Microtech energy 400 kbd инструкция на русском

-PRELIMINARYtechnical user manual electronic controller for Chiller/Heat pump up to 4 steps

1 SUMMARY

1

SUMMARY

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………2

2

How to use this manual

……………………………………………………………………………………………………..4

3

Introduction

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………5

3.1

Components

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5

3.1.1

3.1.2

3.1.3

3.1.4

3.1.5

3.1.6

3.1.7

Energy 400

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5

Extension

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………5

Keyboards

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….5

CF (Control Fan) Modules

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5

Copy Card

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….5

Serial Interface (EWTK)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5

Param Manager

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5

4

Installation

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..6

4.1

Connection diagrams

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6

4.2

Configuration of analogue inputs

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6

4.3

Configuration of digital inputs

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8

4.4

Configuration of outputs

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9

4.4.1

4.4.2

4.4.3

Power outputs

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….9

Low voltage outputs

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9

Serial outputs

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9

4.5

Physical quantities and units of measurement

……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9

User Interface…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………10

5.1

Keys

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10

5.2

Display

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10

5.2.1

5.2.2

Display

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10

Led

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10

5.3

Wall-mounted keyboard

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………11

5.4

Programming

parameters

– Menu levels……………………………………………………………………………………………………………11

5.5

Visibility of

parameters

and submenus………………………………………………………………………………………………………………14

5.5.1

Copy Card

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….14

6

System configuration

………………………………………………………………………………………………………..15

6.1

Compressors

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….15

6.2

Compressor configuration

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………15

6.2.1

6.2.2

Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….16

Compressor timing

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..17

6.3

Condensation fan

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….18

6.3.1

6.3.2

Fan configuration

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..18

Fan control configuration

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..18

6.4

Reversing valves

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….19

6.5

Hydraulic pump

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….19

6.6

Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters

…………………………………………………………………………………………………….19

6.7

Internal fan

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………19

6.8

Condensation-

Defrost

probes……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..19

7

Temperature control functions

………………………………………………………………………………………….21

7.1

Setting set points

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….21

7.2

Dynamic Set point

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..21

7.3

Load control

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….23

7.3.1

7.3.2

7.3.3

7.3.4

7.3.5

7.3.6

Compressor control – regulation algorithm

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..23

Condensation fan control

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..24

Combined or Separate Condensation

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….26

Hydraulic pump control

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………26

Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..27

Reversing valve control

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..27

8

Functions

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………28

8.1

Recording hours of operation

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………28

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

2

8.2

Defrost

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..28

8.2.1

8.2.2

8.2.3

Defrost start

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..28

Control during defrost

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….29

Defrost end

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….29

9

Parameters

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………31

9.1

Description of Parameters

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………31

9.2

Parameters table

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..36

10

Diagnostics

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………40

10.1

List of alarms

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………40

11

Technical features

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….46

11.1

Technical data

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………46

11.2

Electromechanical features

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….46

11.3

Regulations

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………46

12

Use of the device

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………47

12.1

Permitted use

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47

12.2

Forbidden use

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47

13

Responsibility and residual risks

………………………………………………………………………………………..48

14

Glossary

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………49

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

3

References

Cross references

Icons for emphasis:

2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

x

This manual is designed to permit quick, easy reference with the following features:

References

column:

A column to the left of the text contains

references

to subjects discussed in the text to help you locate the information you need quickly and easily.

Cross references

:

All words written in italics are referenced in the subject index to help you find the page containing details on this subject; supposing you read the following text:

”when the alarm is triggered, the

compressors

will be shut down”

The italics mean that you will find a reference to the page on the topic of

compressors

listed under the item

compressors

in the index.

If you are consulting the manual “on-line” (using a computer), words which appear in italics are hyperlinks: just click on a word in italics with the mouse to go directly to the part of the manual that discusses this topic.

Some segments of text are marked by icons appearing in the

references

column with the meanings specified below:

Take note: information on the topic under discussion which the user ought to keep in mind

Tip: a recommendation which may help the user to understand and make use of the information supplied on the topic under discussion.

Warning! :

information which is essential for preventing negative consequences for the system or a hazard to personnel, instruments, data, etc., and which users MUST read with care.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

4

3 INTRODUCTION

x

Energy 400

is a compact device that permits control of air conditioning units of the following types:

• air-air

• air-water

• water-water

• motor-condensing

The controller can manage machines with up to four

power step

s distributed in a maximum of 2

cooling

circuits (for example, 2 circuits, with 2

compressors

per circuit).

Main characteristics:

Outflowing water temperature control

• Condensation control

2 inputs which may be configured for NTC or 4-20mA (through

parameters

)

• 11 configurable

digital inputs

+ (4 four optional)

Dynamic set point

• Setting of

parameters

from the

keyboard

, with a personal computer or with a interface module

Remote keyboard

(100 m) which may be connected up directly without serial interfaces.

• 3 4-20 mA

outputs

Control of 1, 2, 3, or 4

compressors

.

3.1 Components

We will now look at the basic

components

and accessories in the system and how they are connected.

3.1.1 Energy 400

The basic module is an electronic card for connection with I/O resources and a CPU as described in the section on

connection diagrams

.

3.1.2 Extension

The basic module is an electronic card for connection as described in the section on

connection diagrams

.

3.1.3 Keyboards

Two types of

keyboard

are available:

TS-P: Panel

keyboard

(32×74)

TS-W:

Wall-mounted keyboard

3.1.4 CF (Control Fan) Modules

Used to connect fans with

Energy 400 low voltage outputs

.

3.1.5 Copy Card

Can be used to upload and download the

Energy 400

parameter map.

3.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK)

A device which permits the controller to interface with a Personal Computer

It must be connected up as illustrated in the figure

The PC must be connected with the interface module, and the interface module with the device, with no power

on to any of the devices, and in compliance with current safetyregulations . Be careful to avoid electrostatic

shocks, especially on exposed metal parts of the devices; allow electrostatic shocks to discharge into the ground before handling.

3.1.7 Param Manager

If you have an adequate Personal Computer with Windows 95 or a more recent operating system, the

Param Manager

software, an adequate interface module and proper wiring, you can have full control over all

Energy 400 parameters

via

Personal Computer.

The instrument can be programmed easily and quickly using a series of interfaces which permit a logical, guided approach.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

5

4 INSTALLATION

x

Before proceeding with any operation, first make sure that you have connected up the power supply to the

device through an appropriate external current trransformer.

Always follow these rules when connecting boards to one another and to the application:

Never apply

loads

which exceed the limits set forth in these specifications to

outputs

;

Always comply with

connection diagrams

when connecting up

loads

;

To prevent electrical couplings, always wire low voltage

loads

separately from high voltage

loads

;

4.1 Connection diagrams

Basic module

Detail of connectors

Analogue inputs

Instrument configuration is determined by the values of the

parameters

associated with inputs and

outputs

.

4.2 Configuration of analogue inputs

There are 6

analogue inputs

:

4 NTC transducers,

• 2 configurable NTC/4-20mA transducers.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

6

Analogue inputs: resolution and precision

Analogue inputs: configuration table

The following devices shall henceforth be referred to by the codes ST1….ST4:

ST1 – Temperature control probe: inflowing water or air, reading

range

: -30 ° C ÷ 90 ° C;

ST2 – Configurable probe, reading

range

: -30

°

C

÷

90

°

C;

ST3 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mA

ST4 — Configurable probe, reading

range

: -30

°

C

÷

90

°

C;

ST5 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mA

ST6 — Configurable probe, reading

range

: -30

°

C

÷

90

°

C;

4

analogue inputs

are available on the

extension

which is not used in this release.

The resolution of NTC

analogue inputs

is one tenth of a Kelvin degree;

They are precise to within 0.8

°

C within the

range

of 0

÷

35

°

C and to within 0.8

°

C

÷

3

°

C in the remainder of the scale.

The 4-20mA input is precise to within 1% FS, with a resolution of one tenth of a Kelvin degree, if the input is configured as a

dynamic set point

, or Kpa*10 if the input is configured as a pressure probe.

ST1-ST6 probes can be configured according to the following table:

Pa.

Description

H11

H12

H13

H14

H15

analogue input

ST1

Configuration of analogue input

ST2

Configuration of analogue input

ST3 analogue input

ST4

Configuration of analogue input

ST5

H16

Configuration of analogue input

ST6

0

Probe absent

Probe absent

Probe absent

Probe absent

Probe absent

Probe absent

1

NTC input inflowing water or air

NTC input outflowing water/air, anti-freeze

NTC input condensation

NTC input condensation

NTC input outflowing water/air

NTC input condensation circuit 2

2

Digital input request for

heating

Digital input request for

cooling

4…20 mA condensation input

Value

3

Digital input request for temperature

4

Differential

NTC input

5

Not permitted control

Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted

4…20 mA input for

dynamic set point

NTC antifreeze for water-water gas reversal machines

NTC

heating

control for water-water water reversal machines

Multifunction al digital input

NTC input for outdoor temperature

Not permitted Not permitted

Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted

4-20mA input condensation

Not permitted Antifreeze input for water-water gas reversal machines

Not permitted

If inputs ST3 and ST6 are defined as 4-20mA inputs under pressure, the scale bottom value of the pressure input is also significant:

Pa H17

= Maximum input value; set the corresponding value to a current of 20 mA

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

7

Digital inputs

Digital inputs: polarity

Digital inputs:

Polarity table

4.3 Configuration of digital inputs

There are 11 voltage-free

digital inputs

, which will henceforth be identified as ID1….ID11.

ST1, ST2, and ST4 may be added to these if they are configured as

digital inputs

(through

parameters Pa H11

,

Pa H12

,

Pa

H14

). 4 more

digital inputs

are available on the

extension

.

The polarity of

digital inputs

is determined by the

parameters

listed below:

ID1, ID2, ID3, ID4 defined by parameter

Pa H18

,

ID5, ID6, ID7, ID8 defined by parameter

Pa H19

ID9, ID10, ID11, ST4 (if configured as digital) defined by parameter

Pa H20

ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15 on

extension

defined by parameter Pa N01

Pa H18

Pa H19

ID1

ID5

ID2

ID6

ID3

ID7

Pa H20

ID9

ID12

ID10

ID13

ID11

ID14

Pa H21

0

1

Closed

Open

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

13

14

15

10

11

12

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

Closed

Open

Closed

Open

Closed

Open

Closed

Open

Closed

Open

Closed

Open

Closed

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Open

Open

Open

Open

Open

Open

ID4

ID8

ST4

ID15

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Example: A value of “10” for parameter

Pa H18

indicates that

digital inputs

ID1 and ID3 are active when their contacts are closed and

digital inputs

ID2 and ID4 are active when their contacts are open:

Digital inputs:

Configuration

Table

Pa H18

10

ID1

Closed

ID2

Open

ID3

Closed

ID4

Open

If ST1 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter

Pa H21

If ST2 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H22

Parameter Value Description

0

1

Active if closed

Active if open

All

digital inputs

are configurable and may be given the meanings listed below by setting

parameters Pa H23

through

Pa

H34

and Pa N02 through Pa N05

Parameter Value Description

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

16

17

18

19

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

Input disabled

Flow switch

Remote OFF

Remote Heat/Cool

Thermal switch compressor 1

Thermal switch compressor 2

Thermal switch compressor 3

Thermal switch compressor 4

Thermal switch fan circuit 1

Thermal switch fan circuit 2

High pressure circuit 1

High pressure circuit 2

Low pressure circuit 1

Low pressure circuit 2

High pressure compressor 1

High pressure compressor 2

High pressure compressor 3

High pressure compressor 4

End of

End of

defrost defrost

circuit 1

circuit 2

In the case of multiple inputs configured with the same value, the function associated with the input will carry out a

Logical OR among the inputs.

Outputs

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

8

Configuration table

Polarity Table

Configuration of fan outputs

4.4 Configuration of outputs

There are two basic types of

outputs

:

power outputs

, and

low voltage outputs

.

4.4.1 Power outputs

There are 8

power outputs

, which shall henceforth be referred to as RL1…RL8 (relays).

RL1 — compressor 1, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

RL2 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

RL3 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

RL4 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

RL5 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

RL6 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

RL7 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

RL8 – cumulative alarm, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

There are 2 additional digital

outputs

in the

extension

module:

RL9 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

RL10 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

Configurable

outputs

may be given the following meanings by setting

parameters Pa H35

through

Pa H40

and Pa N06 through Pa N07

7

8

9

10

11

5

6

3

4

1

2

Value

0

Description

Disabled

Reversal valve circuit 1

Reversal valve circuit 2

Condenser fan circuit 1

Condenser fan circuit 2

Electrical heater 1

Electrical heater 2

Pump

Evaporator fan

Power Step

Power Step

Power Step

2

3

4

Polarity of RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5,RL8 may be selected using

Pa H41

Pa H45

Parameter Value Description

0

1

Relay closed if output active

Relay open if output not active

If multiple

outputs

are configured with the same resource, the

outputs

will be activated in parallel.

4.4.2 Low voltage outputs

There are a total of 4

low voltage outputs

available: 2 phase cut

outputs

and 2 4-20 mA

outputs

:

TK1 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 1.

TK2 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 2.

AN1 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 1

AN2 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 2

Outputs

AN1 and AN2, though their connections are physically separate, are alternatives to

outputs

TK1 and TK2 which are selected by

parameters Pa H45

and

Pa H46

Fan config. parameter Index

Fan 1 output

Fan 2 output

H45

H46

Value 0

Fan 1 output in phase cut

Fan 2 output in phase cut

Value 1

Fan 1 output in 4-20 mA

Fan 2 output in 4-20 mA

4.4.3 Serial outputs

There are 2 asynchronous serials on the control:

• channel for serial communication with a personal computer through a Microtech interface module

• channel for serial communication with a standard Microtech

keyboard

. Power supply 12 VDC (2400,e,8,1).

Unit of measurement: selection

4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement

Parameter

Pa H64

may be used to set temperature

display

in either degrees °C or degrees °F:

Pa H64

0

1

Unit of measurement

Degrees °C

Degrees °F

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

9

Keyboard

5 USER INTERFACE

x

The interface on the front panel of the instrument can be used to carry out all the operations connected to the use of the instrument, and in particular to:

Set operating mode

• Respond to alarm situations

Check the state of resources

Front panel of the instrument

Mode

The instrument can function without the aid of a

keyboard

5.1 Keys

Selects operating mode:

If the

heating

mode is enabled, each time the key is pressed the following sequence occurs:

Stand-by

à

cooling

à

heating

à

stand-by

if

heating

mode is not enabled:

Stand-by

à

cooling

à

stand-by

In menu mode, this key acts as a

SCROLL UP

or UP key (increasing value).

Resets

alarms

, and turns the instrument on and off.

Press once to

reset

all manually

reset alarms

not currently active; all the

alarm events per hour

will also be

reset

even if the

alarms

are not active.

Hold down the key for 2 seconds to turn the instrument from on to off or vice versa. When it is off, only the decimal point remains on the

display

. In menu mode this key acts as a

SCROLL DOWN

or DOWN key (decreasing value).

Pressing the “mode” and “on-off”

keys

at the same time:

If you press both

keys

at the same time and then release within 2 seconds, you will move one level deeper in the

display

menu.

If you press both

keys

for more than 2 seconds you will move one level up.

If you are currently viewing the lowest level in the menu and you press both

keys

and release within 2 seconds, you will go up one level.

5.2 Display

The device can communicate information of all kinds on its status, configuration, and

alarms

through a

display

and a number of leds on its front panel.

5.2.1 Display

Normal

display

shows:

• regulation temperature in tenths of degrees celsius or fahrenheit

• the alarm code, if at least one alarm is active. If multiple

alarms

are active, the one with greater priority will be displayed, according to the Table of

Alarms

.

• If temperature control is not analogue and depends on the status of a digital input (ST1 or ST2 configured as

digital inputs

), the “On” or “Off” label will be displayed, depending on whenther temperature control is active or not.

• When in menu mode, the

display

depends on the current position; labels and codes are used to help the user identify the current function.

5.2.2 Led

Led

1 compressore 1.

ON if compressor 1 is active

• OFF if compressor 1 if off

Rapid

BLINK

if

safety timing

is in progress

• Slow

BLINK

if compressor is currently set to

defrost

Power step

2

led

ON if

power step

2 is active

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

10

OFF if

power step

2 is not active

• Rapid

BLINK

if

safety timing

is in progress

Slow

BLINK

if step 2 is currently defrosting

Remote keyboard

Led

step 3 di potenza

ON se lo step 3 di potenza è attivo

• OFF se lo step 3 di potenza non è attivo

BLINK

veloce se sono in corso temporizzazioni di sicurezza

BLINK

lento se step 3 in sbrinamento

Power step

4

led

ON if

power step

4 is active

• OFF if

power step

4 is not active

Rapid

BLINK

if

safety timing

is in progress

• Slow

BLINK

if step 4 is defrosting

Electrical heater/boiler

led

ON if at least one internal anti-freeze electrical heater or boiler is enabled

• OFF if both are off

Heating Led

ON if the device is in

heating

mode.

Cooling Led

• ON if the controller is in

cooling

mode

If neither the

HEATING led

nor the

COOLING led

are in, the controller is in

STAND-BY

mode.

When it is off, only the decimal point appears on the

display

.

5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard

The

remote keyboard

a on the

display

is an exact copy of the information displayed on the instrument, with the same leds;

Remote keyboard

It performs exactly the same

functions

as those described in the

display

section.

The only difference is in use of the UP and DOWN

keys

(to increase and decrease value), which are separate from the

MODE and ON/OFF

keys

.

5.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels

Device

parameters

may be modified using a Personal Computer (with the required software, interface key and cables), or using the

keyboard

;

If using the

keyboard

, access to

parameters

is arranged in a hierarchy of levels which may be accessed by pressing the

“mode and “on-off”

keys

at the same time (as described above).

Each menu level is identified by a mnemonic code which appears on the

display

.

The structure is set up as shown in the diagram below:

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

11

Menu structure

Control probe

Current alarm

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

Set point:

Analogue Inp.:

Alarms:

Digital input:

Parameters:

Password:

Op. hours:

Label cooling set:

Label heating set:

Input code.: —

Current alarms Code:

Input code: —

Configuration par.:

Compressor par.:

Fan control par.:

Alarms par.:

Pump par.:

Antifreeze par.:

Defrost par.:

Password value

Comp. hours:

Pump hours:

Value cooling set

Value heating set

Val. analogue input

Status of digital input

Par. index

Par. index

Par. index

Par. index

Par. index

Par. index

Par. index

Number of hours par.

Number of hours par.

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

13

5.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus

With a personal computer, interface key, suitable cables and the “

Param Manager

” software, it is possible to restrict the visibility and modification of

parameters

and entire submenus.

A “visibility value” may be assigned to each parameter, as described below:

Value

0003

0258

0770

0768

Meaning

Parameter or label visible at all times

Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password =

Pa

H46

)

Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password =

Pa

H46

). Parameter cannot be modified.

Parameter visible from PC only.

Some visibility settings are factory set.

For more information, please refer to the “

Param Manager

” instructions.

5.5.1 Copy Card

The

copy card

can store the whole map of

Energy 400 parameters

;

To download the map present in the

copy card

, proceed as follows:

1. Connect the key to the appropriate

Energy 400

output (refer to

connection diagrams

) while the device is off.

2. Turn on the

Energy 400

: the

parameters

map in the

copy card

will be copied to the

Energy 400

.

To store the

Energy 400 parameters

map in memory, proceed as follows:

1. Connect the

copy card

to the appropriate

Energy 400

output (refer to

connection diagrams

) while the device is on.

2. From the

keyboard

, access the “password” submenu (refer to

menu structure

) and set the value contained in parameter

Pa H46

: The instrument’s map will be downloaded to the

copy card

.

3. Disconnect the

copy card

when finished.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

14

Power step

6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

x

In this section we will look at how to configure

parameters

for various

loads

on the basis of the type of

installation

to be controlled.

6.1 Compressors

Energy 400

can control systems consisting of up to two

cooling

circuits with 1 to 4

compressors

.

If there is a capacity step, it will be considered as a compressor.

Each compressor is piloted by a device relay (

power outputs

) (each capacity step requires an additional output).

The first compressor must be connected to output RL1; the remaining

outputs

(RL2…RL7) (RL9…RL10 on

extension

) may be assigned at will, setting the value of the

parameters Pa H35

…. PaH40 (Pa N06 … Pa N07 if there is no

extension

).

The

compressors

will be turned on or off depending on the temperatures detected and the

temperature control functions

that have been set (refer to the section on Compressor controls – Regulation algorithml )

6.2 Compressor configuration

The turning on of an additional compressor (or capacity step) will henceforth be referred to as a

Power step

(power level).

The following configurations are available for

compressors

without capacity steps:

Simple compressors

(

1

Pa

H05

=1)

1 (

Pa H06

=1)

RL1=comp. 1 circ.1

Number of

compressors

per circuit

2 (

Pa H06

=2)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = comp 2 circ.1

3 (

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = comp 2 circ.1

Pa H06

=3)

Step3 = comp 3 circ.1

4 (

Pa H06

=4)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = comp 2 circ.1

Step3 = comp 3 circ.1

Step4 = comp 4 circ.1

Configuration error Configuration error

2

(

Pa

H05

=2)

RL1=Comp. 1 circ.1

Step3 = comp. 1 circ.2

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = comp 2 circ.1

Step3 = comp 1 circ.2

Step4 = comp 2 circ.2

with 1 capacity step

The following configurations are available for

compressors

with 1 capacity step (

Pa H07

=1):

(

1

Pa

H05

=1)

Number of

compressors

per circuit

1 (

Pa H06

=1) 2 (

Pa H06

=2)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1

Step3 = comp.2 circ.1

Step4 = cap. step1 Comp.2 circ.1

2

(

Pa

H05

=2)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1

Step3 = comp.1 circ.2

Step4 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.2

Configuration error

with 2 or 3 capacity steps

The following configurations are available for

compressors

with 2 or 3 capacity steps (

Pa H07

=2 or

Pa H07

=3):

(

1

Pa

H05

=1)

Number of

compressors

per circuit

1 (

Pa H06

=1 and

Pa H07

=2) 2 (

Pa H06

=2 and

Pa H07

=3)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1

Step4 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1

Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1

Step3 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1

Step4 = cap. step3 comp.1 circ.1

2

(

pa

H05

=2)

Configuration error Configuration error

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

15

Compressors: coming on on the basis of hours of operation and circuit saturation

Compressors: coming on on the basis of hours of operation and circuit balancing

6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences

Depending on the temperature conditions detected by the probes, the

temperature control functions

of the “

Energy 400

” may request turning on and off of

compressors

/capacity steps (

power step

s).

The sequence in which

compressors

/capacity steps (steps) are turned on and off may be determined by adjusting the values of

parameters Pa H08

and

Pa H09

as described below:

Par Description

Pa H08 Power step

on sequence

Parameter value

0

Depends on number of hours of

1

Unvaried on sequence operation

Circuit saturation Circuit balancing

Pa H09

Circuit balacing

When on sequences depend on the number of hours of operation, of 2 available

compressors

, the one which has been operated for less hours will come on first, and the one which has been operated for more hours will always go off first. In an unvaried on sequence, the compressor with the lower number will always come on first (compressor 1 before compressor 2) and the compressor with the higher number will always go off first.

The circuit balancing parameter is significant only if there are 2 circuits and 2 steps per circuit. If we select H09=0, all

power step

s in one circuit will come on before those in the other circuit. If H09=1 (balancing),

power step

s will come on in such a way that both circuits are delivering the same power, or the difference is no more than one step.

Let us take a closer look at the various combinations:

Pa H08

=0

Pa H09

=0

CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER

CIRCUIT:

The compressor with the least hours of operation comes on first, then the capacity step for the same circuit, the compressor on the other circuit, and, lastly, its capacity step.

When turning off, the capacity step of the compressor with the most hours of operation goes off first, then the corresponding compressor, then the other capacity step and finally the other compressor.

CASE OF 2

COMPRESSORS

PER CIRCUIT:

If all

compressors

are off to start with, the circuit which has the lower

average number of hours

for all its

compressors

will come on first. In this circuit the compressor with the least hours of operation will come on first, followed by the other compressor in the same circuit: thus the circuit is saturated. The next step is chosen between the two

compressors

in the other circuit with fewer hours.

Example:

Supposing the system has been configured as follows:

RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1

Step2 = capacity step compressor 2

Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2

Step4 = capacity step compressor 2

If

hours comp.1 > hours comp.2

they will come on in this order

Step3à Step4à

à

and go off in this order

Step2à

à

Step4à

Step2

Step3

Example:

Supposing the system has been configured as follows:

RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1

Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1

Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2

Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2

If

hours comp.1 > hours comp.2

hours comp.4 > hours comp.3

(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 + hours comp.3)/2

they will come on in this order

Step3à Step4à Step2à RL1

and go off in this order

à

Step2à Step4à Step3

Pa H08

=0 and

Pa H09

=1

CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER

CIRCUIT:

The compressor with the least hours of operation comes on first, followed by the compressor in the other circuit, the capacity step of the first circuit to come on, and, lastly, the other capacity step. When going off, the capacity step of the compressor with the most hours goes off first, followed by the capacity step of the other compressor, the compressor with the most hours and, lastly, the remaining compressor.

CASE OF 2

COMPRESSORS

PER CIRCUIT

If all

compressors

are off to start with, the circuit with the lower

average number of hours

for its

compressors

will come on first. The average is calculated as the ratio between the total number of hours of the

compressors

available and the number of

compressors

in the circuit. In this circuit, the compressor with the least hours will come on first, then the compressor in the other circuit with the least hours, the other compressor in the first circuit and, lastly, the remaining compressor.

Example:

Supposing the system has been configured as follows:

RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1

Step2 = capacity step compressor 2

Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2

Step4 = capacity step compressor 2

if

hours comp.1 > hours comp.2

they will come on in this order

Step3à RL1à

à

and go off in this order

Step2à

à

RL1à

Step2

Step3

Example:

Supposing the system has been configured as follows

RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1

Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1

Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2

Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2

if

hours comp.1 > hours comp.2

hours comp.4 > hours comp.3

(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 + hours comp.3)/2

they will come on in this order

Step3à Step2à Step4à RL1

and go off in this order

à

Step4à Step2à Step3

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

16

Compressors: unvaried on sequence with circuit saturation

Compressors: unvaried on sequence with circuit balancing

Safety timing

Off-on timing

On-on timing

Pa H08

=1 and

Pa H09

=0

CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT

The compressor con with the lower number comes on first, then its capacity step, then the compressor in the other circuit and, lastly, its capacity step. The capacity step for the compressor with the highest number is the first to go off, followed by the capacity step of the other compressor, and finally the compressor.

CASE OF 2

COMPRESSORS

PER CIRCUIT

Exactly the same as the first case.

Example:

Supposing the system has been configured as follows:

RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1

Step2 = capacity step compressor 2

Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2

Step4 = capacity step compressor 2

they will come on in this order

RL1à Step2à Step3à

and go off in this order

Step4

Step4à Step3à Step2à RL1

Pa H08

=1 e

Pa H09

=1

CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT

The compressor with the lowest number comes on first, then the compressor in the other circuit, the capacity step of the first compressor and then the capacity step of the second compressor. They go off in reverse order.

CASE OF 2

COMPRESSORS

PER CIRCUIT

Exactly the same as the first case.

Example:

Supposing the system has been configured as follows:

RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1

Step2 = capacity step compressor 2

Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2

Step4 = capacity step compressor 2

they will come on in this order

RL1à Step3à Step2à

and go off in this order

Step4

Step4à Step2à Step3à RL1

In the unvaried sequence, if the compressor with the lower number is unavailable, the compressor with the higher number comes on.

If the compressor comes available and the amount of power required is equal to the amount of power being delivered, the machine will continue to function in its current state: it will not turn off a compressor with a higher number to turn on a compressor with a lower number.

A compressor is unavailable when it is shut down due to an alarm or is currently counting

safety timing

.

6.2.2 Compressor timing

The turning on and off of

compressors

must comply with safety times which may be set by the user using the

parameters

specified below:

There is a safety interval between the time a compressor goes off and the time the same compressor comes back on

(compressor on…off safety time, controlled by parameter

Pa C01

);

This interval of time must elapse when the “

Energy 400

” is turned on.

There is a safety interval between the time a compressor is turned on and the time it is turned on again (compressor on…on safety time, controlled by parameter

Pa C02

) .

Off-on and on-on diagram for 1 compressor

Compressor

ON

OFF

OFF – ON safety time

Pa C01

Seconds*10

ON – ON safety time

Pa C02

On-on off-off times for 2 comp.

If the machine has multiple

power step

s, there are intervals of time which must pass between turning on of 2

compressors

(

Pa C06

) and turning off of 2

compressors

(

Pa C07

). An amount of time determined by parameter

Pa C08

(capacity step on delay) must elapse between the turning on of one compressor or capacity step and the turning on of any other

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

17

on-on and off-off diagram 2 comp

compressor or capacity step on the machine. The greatest of the currently active safety times must be applied to each compressor.

The off time interval between

compressors

is not applied in the event of a compressor shutdown alarm, in which case they stop immediately.

Comp.1

ON

OFF

Comp.2

ON

OFF

Seconds

Interval between turning on compressors Pa C05

Interval between turning off compressors Pa C07

Seconds

6.3 Condensation fan

Energy 400

” may be connected with two types of fan piloting unit:

• Triak

4-20 mA

6.3.1 Fan configuration

First of all, correctly configure the type of analogue output (

low voltage outputs

) to which the fan control module(s) are connected; the relevant

parameters

are

Pa H45

for the first circuit and

Pa H46

for the second circuit, as shown in the table below:

Parameter value

0

1

Circuit 1 –

Pa H45

TK output enabled for phase

Circuit 2 –

Pa H46

TK output enabled for phase cut cut

Enable 4-20 mA output AN1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN2

Pick-up

Phase shift

Impulse duration

Fan configuration: selection of output type

If the output is configured as a proportional triac, the

parameters PICK-UP

,

PHASE SHIFT

, and

IMPULSE DURATION

are also significant.

Every time the external fan is started up, power is supplied to the exchanger fan at maximum voltage, and the fan operates at maximum speed, for an amount of time equal to

Pa F02

seconds; after this time the fan operates at the speed set by the regulator.

Pa F02

= Fan

pick-up

time (seconds)

Determines a delay during which it is possible to compensate the different electrical characteristics of the fan drive motors:

Pa F03

= duration of fan

phase shift

expressed as a percentage.

Determines the duration of the TK output piloting impulse in microseconds*10

Pa F04

= triak piloting

impulse duration

6.3.2 Fan control configuration

The fan control may be configured to supply a proportionate output (0-100%) or to function as “ON OFF” by setting the value of the parameter

Pa F01

:

Pa F01

=

Selection

of control output type

Pa F01

= 0 proportionate fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on

parameters

)

Pa F01

= 1

Pa F01

= 2 fan “on-off” output; in this mode the control performs the same calculations as in proportionate output, but if the outcome is greater than 0, the control output will be 100.

on-off operation as called by compressor. In this mode output is 0 if no compressor is on in the circuit, or 100% if at least one compressor in the circuit is on

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

18

Reversing valve

If some of the relays are configured as

condensation fan outputs

(

Pa H35

Pa H40

and Pa N06- Pa N07=3 or 4), they will be on if the control output for each fan is greater than 0; otherwise, they will be off.

6.4 Reversing valves

The

reversing valve

is used only when operating in “heat pump” mode.

Energy 400

” can control up to 2

reversing valves

in a dual circuit system.

The

reversing valve

in circuit 1 is active only if:

• a relay (power output) is configured as

reversing valve

for circuit 1 (

Pa H35

Pa H40

or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 1).

The

reversing valve

in circuit 2 is active only if:

• a relay (power output) is configured as

reversing valve

for circuit 2 (

Pa H35

Pa H40

or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 2)

• there are 2 circuits

Both of them will be active only if the heat pump is in operation (Pa H10=1 )

6.5 Hydraulic pump

The

hydraulic pump

is active only if at least one relay (power output) is configured as pump output (

Pa H35

Pa H40

or Pa

N06-Pa N07= 7 ) .

The pump may be configured to function independently of the compressor or whenever called up using parameter

Pa P01

:

Pa P01

= Pump operating mode

0=continuous operation

1=operation when called up by regulation algorithm with a flow switch alarm (table of

alarms

) which is active with automatic

reset

, the pump will be on even if the compressis off.

configuration

6.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters

Energy 400

” can control up to 2

anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters

.

The electrical heater output is active only if the relays (

power outputs

) are configured as electrical heaters 1 or 2 (

Pa H35

Pa H40

or Pa N06-Pa N07= 5 or 6) .

If configured in this way, the

outputs

will command the electrical heater to come on or go off, depending on the

parameters

of configuration of electrical heaters

Pa R01

Pa R06

, as described below:

Parameter Description

Pa R01

Pa R02

Pa R03

Pa R06

Defrost

configuration

Cooling

mode configuration

Heating

mode configuration

OFF or

STAND-BY

configuration

0

comes on only when requested by

Value

1

always on during

defrost

control off during

cooling

off during

heating

off when OFF or on

STAND-BY

on during

cooling

(depending on antifreeze electrical heater control) on during

heating

(depending on antifreeze electrical heater control)

Electrical heaters on when OFF or on

STAND-BY

probe configuration

Parameters

r04 and r05 determine which probe the electrical heaters will control.

Each of the two electrical heaters may be set to any one of probes ST1, ST2 or ST5.

If the is absent or configured as a digital input, the electrical heaters will always be off.

Pa r04

configuration probe set to electrical heater 1

Pa r05

configuration probe set to electrical heater 2

2

3

0

1

Value

Parameters

Description

Electrical heater off

Set to ST1

Set to ST2

Set to ST5

6.7 Internal fan

The fan output will be active only if one relay is configured as evaporator fan output.

The output is ON if at least one compressor is ON; otherwise it is off. During

defrost

the output is always off.

6.8 Condensation-Defrost probes

Energy 400

” can control defrosting of one or more circuits depending on

system configuration

.

Defrost

is enabled if:

• stated by the “Enable

defrost

” parameter (

Pa d01

= 1)

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

19

• the condensation probe for circuit 1 is present (connected to analogue input ST3) and the relative parameter

Pa H13

= 1 (in the case of an NTC probe) or

Pa H13

= 2 (in the case of a 4-20mA probe) and ST4 = 1

• the

reversing valve

is present

In the case of a dual circuit system,

defrost

may be separate or combined (this will be the case of a system with a single condenser) depending on the setting of the parameter

Pa F22

: condensation type

Pa F22

: condensation type

0

Separate condensers

1

Combined condensation

separate or combined condensation probe configuration

Defrost end

and start depends on the values of the condensation probes, which may be configured as follows:

Let SCC1 be the condensation probe of circuit 1; it may be connected to analogue input ST3 or ST4; depending on the type of probe, the configuration will be as shown in the table below:

Probe type

SCC1 NTC type

SCC1 4-20mA type

Probe connected to

ST3

Pa H13

Pa H13

= 1

= 2

The following table applies to a dual circuit system:

Probe connection

Probe connected to

ST4

Pa H14

= 1

Defrost

circuit 1

Defrost

circuit 2

1 circuit 2 circuits, separate

defrost

SCC1

SCC1

ST6

(*) If A and B are control probes, MIN(A;B) represents the smaller of A and B, if A and B are declared present.

It will be value A if B is not declared present.

It is impossible for A not to be declared present.

2 circuits, combined

defrost

(*)

MIN(SCC1;ST6)

MIN(SCC1;ST6)

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

20

Operating modes

Cooling

Heating

Stand-by

Device off

Operating modes: configuration table

7 TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

x

Once ”

Energy 400

” has been configured,

loads

may be controlled on the basis of temperature and pressure conditions detected by probes and

temperature control functions

which may be defined using the appropriate

parameters

.

There are 4 possible

operating modes

:

cooling

heating

stand-by

• off

Cooling

: this is the “summer” operating mode; the machine is configured for

cooling

.

Heating

: this is the “winter” operating mode; the machine is configured for

heating

.

Stand-by

: the machine does not govern any temperature control function; it continues to signal

alarms

Off: machine is turned off.

The operating mode is determined by settings entered on the

keyboard

and by the following

Parameters

:

Configuration parameter ST1 (Pa H11) ( refer to

Analogue inputs: configuration table

)

Configuration parameter ST2 (Pa H12) ( refer to

Analogue inputs: configuration table

)

Operating mode

selection

parameter (Pa H49)

Heat pump parameter (Pa H10 )

Operating mode

selection

parameter (Pa H49)

0=

Selection

from

keyboard

1=

Selection

from digital input (refer to

digital inputs

)

Heat pump parameter (Pa H10)

0 = Heat pump not present

1 = Heat pump present

Combinations of these

parameters

will generate the following rules:

Operating mode

Mode

selection

from

keyboard

Mode

selection

from digital input.

If input ST1 is on, operating mode is

heating

; if not,

stand-by

If input ST2 is on, operating mode is

cooling

; if not,

stand-by

If input ST1 is on, operating mode is

heating

; if input ST2 is on, operating mode is

cooling

; if ST1 and ST2 are both on, there is a control error; if neither is on, operating mode is

stand-by

Any

Any

Mode

selection

parameter

Pa H49

0

1

Any

Configuration parameter ST1

Pa H11

Other than 2

Other than 2

2

Other than 2

2

2

2

Configuration parameter ST2

Pa H12

Other than 2

Other than 2

Other than 2

7.1 Setting set points

Unless the machine is configured as a motor condenser,

loads

will come on and go off dynamically depending on the

temperature control functions

set, the temperature/pressure values detected by the probes, and the

set point

s that have been set:

There are two

set point

values:

Cooling Set point

: this is the

set point

used as a reference when the device is in

cooling

mode

Heating Set point

: this is the

set point

used as a reference when the device is in

heating

mode

The

set point

s may be modified from the

keyboard

by accessing the “SET” submenu (refer to

menu structure

).

Their values must fall within a

range

determined by

parameters Pa H02

Pa H01

(

Heating

) and

Pa H04

Pa H03

(

Cooling

).

7.2 Dynamic Set point

The regulation algorithm may be used to modify the

set point

automatically on the basis of outdoor conditions.

This modification is achieved by adding a positive or negative offset value to the

set point

, depending on:

• 4-20 mA analogue input (proportionate to a signal set by the user) or

• temperature of outdoor probe

This function has two purposes: to save energy, or to operate the machine under particularly harsh outdoor temperature conditions.

The

dynamic set point

is active if:

• Activation parameter

Pa H50

= 1

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

21

Control parameters

Modification depending on current input with positive offset

Probe ST3 (

analogue inputs

) is configured as a

dynamic set point

input (

Pa H13

= 3) or probe ST4 (

analogue inputs

) is configured as an outdoor probe (

Pa H14

= 3)

Parameters

for control of the

dynamic set point

:

Pa H51

= max. offset during

cooling

.

Pa H52

= max. offset during

heating

Pa H53

= Outdoor temperature

set point

during

cooling

Pa H54

= Outdoor temperature

set point

during

heating

Pa H55

= Delta of

cooling

temperature

Pa H56

= Delta of

heating

temperature

The interaction of these

parameters

is illustrated in the graphs below:

Positive Offset (H32>0 or H33>0)

Offset

Set point

Max offset

Modification depending on current input with negative offset

Modification depending on outdoor temperature with positive offset

4 mA

Negative Offset (H32<0 or H33<0)

20 mA Current

Max offset

4 mA 20 mA

Current

Positive Offset

Outdoor temp. set point (H53 or

H54)

Delta <0

Temp.

Delta >0

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

22

Modification depending on outdoor temperature with negative offset

Offset Negativo

Outdoor temp. set point. (H53 or

H54)

Delta <0

Delta >0

Temp.

Regulation algorithm in cool mode

7.3 Load control

We will now look at how to set

parameters

for

load control

on the basis of temperature/pressure conditions detected by probes.

7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithm

The regulation algorithm calculates the load to be supplied through the

compressors

for both

heating

and

cooling

.

REGULATION ALGORITHM IN COOL MODE

If probe ST2 (

analogue inputs

) is not configured as a digital input for requests for

cooling

(

Pa H11

=2) or probe

ST1(

analogue inputs

) as a digital input for regulation algorithm requests (

Pa H12

=3), compressor management will depend on ambient temperature and a

SET POINT

.

ST1 = temperature of inflowing water or inlet air

SET COOL=

cooling set point

set from

keyboard

.

Pa C03

=

hysteresis

of

cooling

thermostat

Pa C05

= delta of

power step

intervention

Cooling diagram

Power

4 th

step

3 rd

step

2 nd

step

1 st

step

Pa C03

Pa C05

Pa C03

Pa C05

Pa C03

Pa C05

Pa C03

ST1

Regulation algorithm in heat mode

If

Pa H01

1 = 3, the

power step

requested will depend on the status of input ST1 (

analogue inputs

).

If

Pa H01

2 = 2, the

power step

requested will depend on the status of input ST2 (

analogue inputs

).

If probe ST5 (

analogue inputs

) is configured as a second step request (

Pa H15

=2), the second step (

power step

) will be requested on the basis of this input. This function will be active only if either

Pa H11

=3 or

Pa H12

=2.

Only motor condensers may be controlled, up to 2 steps only.

REGULATION ALGORITHM IN HEAT MODE

If probe ST1(

analogue inputs

) is not configured as a digital input for requests for heat (

Pa H05

=2) or digital input for requests for regulation algorithm (

Pa H05

=3), compressor management will depend on

• temperature ST3 (

analogue inputs

), if configuration parameter ST3 = 5 (for water/water manual reversal machines)

• otherwise, temperature ST1(

analogue inputs

)

• a

HEATING set point

which may be set from the

keyboard

ST1/ST3 =Temperature of inflowing water or inlet air

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

23

HEATING

SET =

Heating set point

that has been set

Pa C04

=

Heating

thermostat

hysteresis

Pa C05

= Delta of step intervention

Heating diagram

Power

4 th

step

3 rd

step

2 nd

step

1 st

step

Pa C03

Pa C03

Pa C03

Pa C03

ST1/ST3

Differential temperature control

Cool mode

Pa C05 Pa C05

If

Pa H11

= 2-3, the

compressors

will be turned off and on depending on the status of input ST1.

If probe ST5 (

analogue inputs

) is configured as a second step request (

Pa H15

=2), the second step (

power step

) will be requested depending on this input. This function will be active only if

Pa H11

=2,3 or

Pa H12

=2.

DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL

This function may be used to control temperature according to both ST1(

analogue inputs

) and ST4 (

analogue inputs

). The function will be active

• if ST1 is configured as differential NTC input (

Pa H11

= 4)

• if ST4 is configured as outdoor temperature input (

Pa H14

= 3)

In this case, the controller will not control on the basis of ST1, but on the basis of the difference between ST1-ST4; if configuration parameter ST3 is equal to 5 (for water/water machines with manual reversal) in

heating

mode the controller will always control on the basis of ST3.

Differential temperature control

can be used, for instance, to maintain a constant difference in temperature between the outdoor environment and a liquid being heated or cooled.

A compressor will always be off if:

• It is not associated with a relay (power output)

The compressor has been shut down (refer to table of

alarms

)

Safety timing

is in progress

The time lapse between pump on and compressor on is in progress (

safety timing

)

• Preventilation is in progress in

cooling

mode

Energy 400

is in

stand-by

or off mode

• The parameter for configuration of probe ST1

Pa H11

= 0 (probe absent)

7.3.2 Condensation fan control

Condensation control is dependent on the condensation temperature or pressure for the circuit.

Fan control will be on if:

• at least one probe per circuit is configured as a condensation probe (pressure or temperature); if not, the fan for the circuit will come ON and go OFF in response to the circuit

compressors

.

Fan control may be independent of the compressor, or it may be carried out in response to requests from

compressors

;

Operating mode is determined by parameter

Pa F05

:

Value

Pa F05

: fan output mode

0

if all

compressors

in the circuit are off, the fan is off

1

condensation control is independent of the compressor

The

cut-off

is bypassed for an amount of time equal to

Pa F12

after the compressor is turned on. If the control requests

cut-off

during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.

If parameter

Pa F05

is set to 1, condensation control will be dependent on condensation temperature or pressure, depending on how the following

parameters

are set:

CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL

IN COOL MODE

Pa F06

= Minimum fan speed in COOL mode;

Pa F07

= Maximum silent fan speed in COOL mode

Pa F08

= Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

in COOL mode

Pa F09

= Fan prop. band in COOL mode

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

24

Fan control in cool mode: diagram

Pa F10

= Fan

cut-off

delta

Pa F11

=

Cut-off hysteresis

.

Pa F13

= Maximum fan speed in COOL mode

Pa F14

= Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

in COOL mode

An example of interaction of these

parameters

is shown in the figure below:

Fan control in cool mode

Heat mode

Fan control in heat mode: diagram

In

cooling

mode only, if

Pa F05

= 0 (if the compressor is turned off the fan is off), parameter

Pa F21

(preventilation time for outdoor fan) is active.

Before turning on the

compressors

in the circuit the fan must be turned on for an amount of time equal to Pa F25; fan speed is proportionate to condensation temperature, but if the control requests

cut-off

during this time period the fan will run at the minimum speed setting.

This parameter prevents the compressor from starting up with a condensation temperature that is too high.

CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL

IN HEAT MODE

Pa F15

= Minimum fan speed in HEAT mode;

Pa F16

= Maximum silent fan speed in HEAT mode;

Pa F17

= Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

in HEAT mode;

Pa F18

= Fan prop. band in HEAT mode;

Pa F10

= Fan

cut-off

delta;

Pa F11

=

Cut-off hysteresis

;

Pa F19

= Maximum fan speed in HEAT mode;

Pa F20

= Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

in HEAT mode.

An example of interaction of these

parameters

is shown in the figure below:

Fan control in heat mode

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

25

If circuit is in

defrost

mode, the fan is OFF.

The

cut-off

is bypassed for an amount of time equal to

Pa F12

after the compressor is turned on.

If the control requests

cut-off

during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.

The fan will always be off if:

there is an alarm indicating that a

condensation fan

has shut down (refer to table of

alarms

).

Energy 400

is on

stand-by

or off.

diagram

7.3.3 Combined or Separate Condensation

Parameter

Pa F22

may be used to configure a dual circuit machine with a combined condenser.

Pa F22

: condensation type

0

separate condensers

Value

1

combined condenser

If

Pa F22

= 0 the two fans are independent and are controlled by condensation pressure/temperature and the status of the

compressors

in the circuits.

If

Pa F22

= 1 the

outputs

of the 2 fans are in parallel and will be controlled as follows:

by the greater of the condensation probes in the circuits in

cooling

mode

by the smaller of the condensation probes in the circuits in

heating

mode

If one of the 2 circuits does not have a condensation probe a configuration alarm will be generated (refer to table of

alarms

).

7.3.4 Hydraulic pump control

If the pump is configured for continuous operation (

Pa P01

= 0) it will stay on at all times; if not (

Pa P01

= 1) it will be turned on in response to a request from the regulation algorithm.

Interaction between the pump, the

compressors

and the regulation algorithm status is determined by the following

parameters

:

Pa P02

: Delay between pump on and

compressors

on.

Pa P03

: Delay between regulation algorithm off and pump off.

An example is provided in the diagram below:

Reg. algorithm

ON

OFF

Compressor

ON

Time

Pump

OFF

ON

Time

OFF

Delay between pump on and compressor on

Pa P02

Errore. Il collegamento non è valido.

Time

Delay between compressor off and pump off

Pa P03

During a

defrost

, when the compressor is off, the pump will stay on.

The pump will go off if:

There is a pump shut-down alarm, such as a flow switch alarm requiring

manual reset

(refer to table of

alarms

)

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

26

diagram

The instrument is on

stand-by

or off (it goes off after the delay determined by

Pa P03

)

7.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control

Energy 400

can control 2 anti-freeze electrical heaters;

Each electrical heater is controlled with its own

set point

, which is different for

heating

and

cooling

modes, by means of the following

parameters

:

Pa r07

:

set point

of electrical heater 1 in

heating

mode

Pa r08

:

set point

of electrical heater 1 in

cooling

mode

Pa r13

:

set point

of electrical heater 2 in

heating

mode

Pa r14

:

set point

of electrical heater 2 in

cooling

mode

The two

set point

s of the anti-freeze electrical heaters fall within a maximum and a minimum value which the user may set in the form of the following

parameters

:

Pa r09

: maximum

set point

for anti-freeze electrical heater

Pa r10

: minimum

set point

for anti-freeze electrical heater

When off or on

stand-by

. control is based on the

cooling set point

and the control probe used in

heating

mode.

Parameter

Pa R11

determines

hysteresis

around the

set point

s for the

anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters

.

An example of operation is shown in the diagram below

Diagram illustrating

anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters

control

Parallel electrical heaters

PARALLEL ELECTRICAL HEATERS

Parameter r12 enables the

parallel electrical heaters

function..

Supplementary electrical heaters

This function is useful if the system incorporates 2 hydraulic circuits, each with its own anti-freeze probe, and there is only one anti-freeze electrical heater.

The following conditions must apply for the function to be active:

Pa r12

= 1

Pa r05

other than 0

Pa r06

other than 0.

Control is based on the minimum value detected by the 2 probes, using the

set point

s of electrical heaters 1 (

Pa r07

and

Pa r08

)

If

Pa r15

= 1 the electrical heaters have a dual function, as anti-freeze electrical heaters and

supplementary electrical heaters

. If

Pa r15

= 1 and the system is in

heating

mode., electrical heater 1 will start up under the command of its own control or if ST1 <(SET

HEATING

Pa r14

) while heater 2 ) will start up if ST1 <(SET

HEATING

Pa r15

) . The control

hysteresis

is

Pa C04

(

heating

control

hysteresis

).

7.3.6 Reversing valve control

The

reversing valves

are turned off if

Energy 400

is off or on

stand-by

;

The valves are ON in

cooling

mode and OFF in

heating

and

defrost

modes.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

27

x

8 FUNCTIONS

8.1 Recording hours of operation

The devices stores the number of hours of operation of the following in

permanent memory

:

hydraulic pump

compressors

.

It is precise to within one minute.

Hours of operation may be displayed by entering the appropriate menu with the label Ohr (refer to

menu structure

) .

The whole value is displayed if it is less than 999 hours; if it exceeds this value, the hundreds of hours will be shown and the decimal point will appear:

For example, 1234 hours will be displayed as follows:

To set the number of hours to zero, hold the DOWN key (refer to

keys

) down for two seconds while displaying the number of hours of operation.

Power failure

MEMORY

35.48

MEMORY

35

In the event of a power failure, the latest fraction of an hour recorded is set to 0, so that duration is rounded down:

Stopping timer

Setting timer to zero

Defrost: compressor management

8.2 Defrost

The

defrost

function is active in

heating

mode only.

It is used to prevent ice formation on the surface of the external exchanger, which can occur in locations with low temperatures and high humidity and will considerably reduce the machine’s thermodynamic performance, creating a risk of damage to the machine.

Defrost start

and end depends on the condensation probe values (refer to condensation probes–

defrost

) and the settings of the

parameters

listed below:

8.2.1 Defrost start

The

defrost start

s as a result of three

parameters

:

Pa d02

: temperature/pressure at which

defrost start

s

Pa d03

:

defrost

interval

When the probe detects temperature/pressure values below the value of parameter

Pa d02

it starts the timer, and when the number of minutes determined by parameter

Pa d03

has expired the

defrost

will start;

The timer will stop if:

• Temperature/pressure rises above the value of parameter

Pa d02

The compressor is turned off

The timer will be set to zero if:

• a

defrost

cycle is completed

• “

Energy 400

” is turned off

• operating mode is changed (refer to

operating modes

)

• temperature rises above the value of parameter

Pa d04

(

defrost end

temperature/pressure)

During the

defrost

the

compressors

are handled as follows:

• combined

defrost

: all

compressors

are turned on at full power;

• separate

defrost

: all

compressors

in the circuit being defrosted are turned on at full power; there may be a delay between compressor coming on and

Defrost start

imposed by parameter Pa d11

Defrost

will take place only if the following conditions are met: :

• The

safety timing

of

compressors

in the circuit must be 0

The delay between circuit defrosts must have expired since the last circuit

defrost

(

Pa d08

)

On a dual circuit machine with combined

defrost

, the following condition must apply:

• in the circuit for which

defrost start

is not requested, compressor safety time = 0 (refer to

safety timing

) so that the two circuits may both start a

defrost

at the same time.

If at the time of

defrost start

the compressor-4-way valve delay time

Pa d06

= 0, the compressor will stay on; if not, the adjustment shown in the diagram below will be carried out.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

28

diagram

Compressors

Reversing valve

Fans

Parameter configuration

8.2.2 Control during defrost

During the

defrost

cycle

loads

are controlled as described below:

compressors

in the circuit for which

defrost

is underway will be turned on to full power, if not already on at full power

The

reversing valve

in the circuit for which

defrost

is underway will behave the way it does in the summer cycle.

When the valve is reversed, a timer begins counting the minimum by-pass time for the circuit involved, equal to “minimum by-pass time during

cooling

” (

Pa A01

).

If the condensation pressure detected falls below (

Pa F23

Pa F24

), the fan will be OFF; if it exceeds

Pa F23

, the fan will be

ON. At the end of the drip stage, if parameter

Pa D07

is not 0 the fans will operate at full speed for an amount of time equal to Pa F25 in order to remove water from the batteries as quickly as possible.

If there are no pressure probes on the machine, this will be applied to temperature.

8.2.3 Defrost end

Defrost end

may be determined by temperature/pressure values read by analogue probes ST3, ST2, ST6 (

analogue inputs

) or by digital input (

digital inputs

).

The

configuration parameters

are:

Pa d09

: Circuit 1

defrost end

probe

Pa d10: Circuit 2

defrost end

probe

Possible values and meanings of these

parameters

are shown below:

Value

Parameters

0

1

2

3

Description

defrost end

in response to digital input

defrost end

in response to ST3

defrost end

in response to ST4

defrost end

in response to ST6

If

Pa d09

=0 (

defrost end

in response to digital input) the digital input configured as “End of

defrost

circuit 1” (

digital inputs

) will be taken into consideration; if Pa d10=0 input “circuit 2

defrost end

”(

digital inputs

) .

In this configuration, as soon as the input becomes active the circuit will have a

defrost end

.

If an analogue input is selected for

defrost end

, the

defrost

will end will pressure/temperature rises above the value of parameter

Pa d04

(

defrost end

temperature/pressure).

If the input is not configured,

defrost

will end only when pressure/temperature rises above the maximum duration set by parameter

Pa d05

Defrost

will always end if duration exceeds the maximum duration set by parameter

Pa D05

.

Drip time

After

defrost end

, if

drip time Pa d07

= 0 the

compressors

will stay on; if not, the adjustment shown in the figure below will take place:

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

29

diagram

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

30

Pa H01

Pa H02

Pa H03

Pa H04

Pa H05

Pa H06

Pa H07

Pa H08

Pa H09

Pa H11

Pa H12

Pa H13

Pa H14

Pa H15

Pa H16

9 PARAMETERS

x

Parameters

make the ”

Energy 400

” a fully configurable device.

They may be modified through:

• instrument

keyboard

• Personal computer (with a suitable connection and “

Param manager

” software)

We will now take a detailed look at all the

parameters

, divided by category.

9.1 Description of Parameters

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

:

Determine the features of the machine.

If one or more of the

parameters

in this category are modified, the cotnroller must be switched off after the modification and switched on again to ensure correct operation.

Maximum

set point

during “

heating

Upper limit on

set point

in “

heating

” mode

Minimum

set point

during “

heating

Lower limit on

set point

in “

heating

” mode

Maximum

set point

during “

cooling

Upper limit on

set point

in “

cooling

” mode

Minimum

set point

during “

cooling

Lower limit on

set point

in “

cooling

” mode

) Number of circuits on machine (

∗∗

Number of

cooling

circuits

0= not permitted

1= 1

cooling

circuit

2= 2

cooling

circuits

Number of

compressors

per circuit (∗∗ )

0= no

compressors

1= 1 compressor

2= 2

compressors

3= 3

compressors

4= 4

compressors

Number of capacity steps per compressor (∗∗ )

0= no capacity steps

1= 1 capacity step per compressor

2= 2 capacity steps per compressor

3= 3 capacity steps per compressor

Compressor on sequence

0= depending on hours of operation

1= unvaried on sequence

Compressor

selection

algorithm

0= circuit saturation

1= circuit balancing

ST1 configuration

Used to configure analogue input ST1

0= No probe

1= Inflowing air/water analogue input

2=

Heating

request digital input

3= Regulation algorithm request digital input

4= NTC differential input

ST2 configuration

0= No probe

1= Circuit 1 outflowing water/antifreeze/inlet air analogue input

2=

Cooling

request digital input

ST3 configuration

0= No probe

1= Condensation control analogue input

2= 4…20 mA condensation input

3= 4…20 mA

dynamic set point

input

4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 1

5= Regulation algorithm input in “

heating

” mode for water-water machines with manual reversal

ST4 configuration

0= No probe

1= Condensation control analogue input

2= Multifunctional digital input

3= Outdoor temperature analogue input

ST5 configuration

0= No probe

1= Outflowing water/anti-freeze/inlet air analogue input, circuit 2

ST6 configuration

0= No probe

1= Condensation control analogue input

2= 4…20 mA condensation input

∗ non sono ammesse configurazioni macchina con numero di gradini superiore a 4

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

31

Pa H17

Pa H18

Pa H19

Pa H20

Pa H21

Pa H23

Pa H24

Pa H25

Pa H26

Pa H27

Pa H28

Pa H29

Pa H30

Pa H31

Pa H32

Pa H33

Pa H34

Pa H35

Pa H36

Pa H37

Pa H38

Pa H39

Pa H40

Pa H41

Pa H42

Pa H43

Pa H44

Pa H45

Pa H46

Pa H47

Pa H48

Pa H49

Pa H50

Pa H51

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

3= Not permitted

4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 2

Bottom of scale pressure value

Pressure value corresponding to an analogue input value (ST3 or ST6) on the 20mA input (if configured as a current input).

Example

if using a pressure transducer with limits of 0-30.0 bar/4-20mA, set PaH17=300

Polarity of

digital inputs

ID1,ID2,ID3,ID4

Polarity of

digital inputs

ID5,ID6,ID7,ID8

Polarity of

digital inputs

ID9,ID10,ID11,ST4

Polarity of

digital inputs

ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15

These

parameters

may be used to select the polarity which will activate the

digital inputs

to suit them to various operating requirements. Refer to

Digital inputs: polarity

when setting input polarity.

Configuration of digital input ID1

Configuration of digital input ID2

Configuration of digital input ID3

Configuration of digital input ID4

Configuration of digital input ID5

Configuration of digital input ID6

Configuration of digital input ID7

Configuration of digital input ID8

Configuration of digital input ID9

Configuration of digital input ID10

Configuration of digital input ID11

Configuration of digital input ST4 if configured as digital

8

9

10

11

Input disabled

Flow switch

Remote OFF

Remote Heat/Cool

Thermal switch compressor 1

Thermal switch compressor 2

Thermal switch compressor 3

Thermal switch compressor 4

Thermal switch fan circuit 1

Thermal switch fan circuit 2

High pressure circuit 1

High pressure circuit 2

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Low pressure circuit 1

Low pressure circuit 2

High pressure compressor 1

High pressure compressor 2

High pressure compressor 3

High pressure compressor 4

Defrost end

circuit 1

Defrost end

circuit 2

Request for

Request for

Request for

power step power step power step

2

3

4

Configuration of output RL2

Configuration of output RL3

Configuration of output RL4

Configuration of output RL5

Configuration of output RL6

Configuration of output RL7

These

parameters

are used to assign various

functions

to relays as required by the type of application.

0= Not in use

1=

Reversing valve

circuit 1

2=

Reversing valve

circuit 2

3=

Condensation fan

circuit 1

4=

Condensation fan

circuit 2

5= Electrical heater 1

6= Electrical heater 2

7=

Hydraulic pump

8= Evaporator fan

9=

Power Step

2

10=

Power Step

3

11=

Power Step

4

Polarity of output RL2

Polarity of output RL3

Polarity of output RL4

Polarity of output RL5

Polarity of output RL8

Relay polarity may be set for the corresponding

outputs

.

0=relay on if output active

1=relay off if output not active

Configuration of analogue output 1 (AN1 or TK1)

Configuration of analogue output 2 (AN2 or TK2)

Condensation fan control outputs

are available with 2 types of signal.

0= Suignal for phase cut fan control

1= 4-20mA output

Not in use

Selection

of operating mode

0=

Selection

from

keyboard

1=

Selection

from digital input

Enable

dynamic set point

If enabled, this function permits automatic variation of the working

set point

depending on outdoor temperature or on a

4-20mA analogue input. The parameter has no meaning if PaH13 ≠ 3 or PaH14 ≠ 3.

0= Function disabled

1= Function enabled

Maximum

dynamic set point

offset in

cooling

mode

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

32

Pa H52

Pa H53

Pa H54

Pa H55

Pa H56

Pa H57

Pa H58

Pa H59

Pa H60

Pa H61

Pa H62

Pa H63

Pa H64

Pa H65

Pa H66

Pa H67

Pa H68

Pa H68

Pa A01

Pa A02

Pa A03

Pa A04

Pa A05

Pa A06

Pa A07

Pa A08

Pa A09

Pa A10

Pa A11

The maximum value that may be added to the

set point

in

cooling

mode (COO) when the

DYNAMIC SET POINT

function is enabled.

Maximum

dynamic set point

offset in

heating

mode

The maximum value that may be added to the

set point

in

heating

mode (HEA) when the

DYNAMIC SET POINT

function is enabled.

Outdoor temperature

set point

in

cooling

mode

The outdoor temperature value on the basis of which …

The parameter is significant only if the

dynamic set point

function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoor temperature probe.

Outdoor temperature

set point

in

heating

mode

The parameter is significant only if the

dynamic set point

function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoor temperature probe.

Outdoor temperature differential in

cooling

mode

The parameter is significant only if the

dynamic set point

function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoor temperature probe.

Outdoor temperature differential in

heating

mode

The parameter is significant only if the

set point

function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoor temperature probe.

Offset ST1,

Offset ST2,

Offset ST3

These

parameters

may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature or pressure reading and the actual temperature or pressure.

Offset ST4

Offset ST5

These

parameters

may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature reading and the actual temperature.

Offset ST6

This parameter may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature (or pressure) reading and the actual temperture or pressure.

Mains frequency

Mains frequency 50 Hz

Mains frequency 60 Hz

Selection

°C or °F

0= degrees °C

1= degrees °F

Family serial address,

Device serial address

These

parameters

may be used to address the device when connected to a personal computer or supervision system.

Normally both are 0.

User password

May be used to enter a password for access to level two

parameters

, and to copy

parameters

from the instrument to the

copy card

.

Copy card

write password

The password that must be entered to copy

parameters

to the

copy card

.

Presence of

keyboard

ALARM PARAMETERS

:

Low pressure pressure switch by-pass time.

Determines the delay between starting up the compressor and starting up the low pressure digital alarm

diagnostics

.

Expressed in seconds.

Low pressure

alarm events per hour

Used to set the number of low pressure digital

alarm events per hour

beyond which the system will switch from automatic

reset

to

manual reset

.

Bypass pump activation flow switch

Determines the delay between activation of the

hydraulic pump

and activation of the flow switch alarm

diagnostics

.

Expressed in seconds.

Duration of active flow switch input

May be used to set the amount of time for which the flow switch digital input must remain active to generate a flow switch alarm. The timer starts after the flow switch by-pass time. Expressed in seconds.

Duration of inactive flow switch input

May be used to set the time for which the flow switch digital input must remain inactive to be included in the corresponding alarm. Expressed in seconds.

Number of flow switch

alarms

/hour

May be used to set the number of flow switch

digital alarms

per hour after which the alarm is switched from automatic to

manual reset

. When this occurs, the

hydraulic pump

is deactivated.

By-pass compressor thermal switch following compressor on

Determines the delay between compressor activation and activation of the compressor thermal switch digital

diagnostics

alarm. Expressed in seconds.

Compressor thermal switch

alarm events per hour

May be used to set a number of compressor thermal switch

alarm events per hour

beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic to

manual reset

.

Number of fan thermal switch events per hour

May be used to set a number of fan thermal events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic to

manual reset

.

Anti-freeze alarm by-pass

Determines the delay between turning on the machine (

selection

of an operating mode or switch from OFF->ON) and activation of the compressor thermal switch digital alarm

diagnostics

. Expressed in seconds.

Anti-freeze alarm

set point

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

33

Pa C03

Pa C04

Pa C05

Pa C06

Pa C07

Pa C08

Pa A12

Pa A13

Pa A14

Pa A15

Pa A16

Pa A17

Pa A18

Pa A19

Pa A20

Pa A21

Pa A22

Pa A23

Pa A24

Pa A25

Pa A26

Pa C01

Pa C02

Pa F01

Pa F02

Pa F03

Pa F04

Pa F05

May be used to set the temperature below which the anti-freeze alarm is triggered.

Anti-freeze alarm

hysteresis

May be used to set the differential value of the anti-freeze alarm.

Anti-freeze

alarm events per hour

May be used to set a number of anti-freeze

alarm events per hour

beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic to

manual reset

.

Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation

set point

May be used to set a condensation pressure/temperature value beyond which the high pressure alarm will be triggered.

Analogue input high pressure/temperature

hysteresis

May be used to set the differential for the analogue high pressure alarm.

Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation bypass

Determines the delay after turning on of the first compressor in the

cooling

circuit and activation of the corresponding analogue input low pressure/temperature analogue alarm

diagnostics

.

Analogue input low pressure/temperature activation

set point

May be used to set a temperature/pressure value below which the low pressure alarm will be triggered.

Analogue input low pressure/temperature

hysteresis

May be used to set the differential for the analogue low pressure/temperature alarm.

Number of analogue input low pressure

alarm events per hour

May be used to set a number of low pressure analogue

alarm events per hour

beyond which the alarm will be switched from automatic to

manual reset

.

Machine out of coolant differential

If the difference between the absolute value of the

set point

and of the control probe exceeds this parameter, the machine out of coolant timer will start.

Bypass machine out of coolant

Determines the delay between the turning on of the first compressor in the corresponding

cooling

circuit and activation of the machine out of coolant alarm

diagnostics

. Expressed in minutes.

Duration of machine out of coolant

Determines the duration of the condition described under parameter A20 beyond which the machine out of coolant alarm will be triggered.

Machine out of coolant alarm triggered

Enables machine out of coolant alarm

diagnostics

0=

diagnostics

disabled

1=

diagnostics

enabled

Enable low pressure alarm during defrosting

Enables the minimum alarm during defrosting.

0= Low pressure alarm

diagnostics

disabled during defrosting

1= Low pressure alarm

diagnostics

enabled during defrosting

Input over-temperature

set point

Temperature value ST1 above which the high temperature alarm E46 is triggered.

Input over-temperature duration

Determines the duration of the condition described for parameter A25 beyond which the input over-temperature alarm is triggered.

COMPRESSOR PARAMETERS

OFF-ON safety time

The minimum amount of time that must pass between turning off the compressor and turning it on again. Expressed in tens of seconds.

ON-ON safety time

The minimum amount of time that must pass between turning the compressor on and turning it on again. Expressed in tens of seconds.

Hysteresis

regulation algorithm during

cooling

May be used to select intervention differential in

cooling

mode.

Hysteresis

regulation algorithm during

heating

May be used to select intervention differential in

heating

mode.

Regulation algorithm step intervention differential

May be used to set a temperature differential in relation to the

set point

beyond which the second step is activated.

Compressor on interval

May be used to set a delay between turning on of two

compressors

.

Compressor off interval

May be used to set a delay between turning off of two

compressors

.

Capacity step on interval

May be used to set a delay between turning on of compressor and of capacity steps.

FAN CONTROL PARAMETERS

:

Fan output configuration

0 = proportional fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on

parameters

)

1 = fan output “on-off”; in this mode the regulation algorithm performs the same calculation as in proportional fan output, but if the result is greater than 0, regulation algorithmoutput will be 100.

2 = on-off operation in response to request from compressor. In this mode output is 0 if no compressor in the circuit is on, or 100% if at least one compressor in the circuit is on.

Fan

pick-up

time

Time for which fan runs at maximum speed after starting up. Expressed in seconds/10.

Fan

phase shift

This parameter may be used to calibrate fan control output in proportion to the type of fan in use, adjusting it to suit the fan’s typical current/voltage

phase shift

.

Impulse duration

of triac on

May be used to vary the length of the impulse from the triac command.

Functioning in resposne to compressor request

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

34

Pa F06

Pa F07

Pa F08

Pa F09

Pa F10

Pa F11

Pa F12

Pa F13

Pa F14

Pa F15

Pa F16

Pa F17

Pa F18

Pa F19

Pa F20

Pa F21

Pa F22

Pa F23

Pa F24

Pa P01

Pa P02

Pa P03

Pa r01

Pa r02

Pa r03

0= if compressor is off, fan is off

1= condensation control independent of compressor

Minimum speed during

cooling

Minimum value of proportional fan control during

cooling

. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0 to 100%,.

Maximum silent speed during

cooling

Maximum value of proportional fan control during

cooling

. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0 to 100%,.

Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

during

cooling

Condensation pressure/temperature value below which the fan runs at minimum

cooling

speed.

Proportional band during

cooling

Temperature/pressure differential corresponding to change from minimum to silent maximum fan speed during

cooling

(F07).

Fan

cut-off

differential

Condensation temperature/pressure differential in relation to temperature/pressure

set point

(F08 or F14) beyond which fan is cut off.

Cut-off hysteresis

.

Condensation temperature/pressure differential for

cut-off

.

Cut-off

bypass time

Determines the amount of time after fan start-up during which fan

cut-off

is excluded. Expressed in seconds.

Maximum speed during

cooling

May be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value in

cooling

mode.

Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure during

cooling

Condensation pressure/temperature value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F13.

Minimum speed during

heating

Minimum proportional fan control value in

heating

mode. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0 to 100%,.

Maximum silent speed during

heating

Maximum value of proportional fan control during

heating

. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0 to 100%,.

Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

during

heating

Condensation temperature/pressure value above which the fan operates at minimum

heating

speed.

Proportional band during

heating

Temperature/pressure differential corresponding to a change from minimum to maximum silent fan speed during

heating

(F16).

Maximum speed during

heating

May be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value during

heating

.

Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

during

heating

Condensation temperature/pressure value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F19.

Preventilation in

cooling

mode

May be used to set a preventilation time in

cooling

mode before compressor combines on in order to prevent.…

Combined or separate fan control

Parameter F22 may be used to configure dual circuit machines with a single condenser.

Parameter F22 condensation type

0= separate condensers

1= combined condenser.

If

Pa F22

= 0 the fans are independent and depend on condensation pressure/temperature and the status of the

compressors

in the circuits. If

Pa F22

= 1 the

outputs

of the 2 fans are parallel and they are controlled:

on the basis of the greater of the two circuit condensation probes in

cooling

mode

on the basis of the smaller of the two circuit condensation probes in

heating

mode

If there is no condensation probe in one of the 2 circuits, a configuration alarm will be generated.

Fan activation temperature/pressure

set point

during defrosting

During defrosting, if temperature/pressure exceeds the “fan activation during defrosting” threshold (

Pa F23

) the fans will come on at full power.

Fan activation

hysteresis

during defrosting

Condensation temperature/pressure differential for fan

control during defrost

ing.

PUMP PARAMETERS

Pump operating mode

May be used to determine pump operating mode:

0=continuous operation

1=operation in response to a request from the regulation algorithm

Delay between pump ON and compressor ON

May be used to set a delay between starting a pump and starting a compressor, expressed in seconds.

Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFF

May be used to set a delay between turning off a compressor and turning off a pump, expressed in seconds.

ANTI-FREEZE/BOILER

PARAMETERS

Configuration of electrical heaters in

defrost

mode

Determines electrical heater operation during defrosting

0=come on only in response to a request from the regulation algorithm

1=always on during defrosting

Configuration of electrical heaters on in

cooling

mode

Determines electrical heater operation in

cooling

mode

0=off during

cooling

1=on during

cooling

(in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)

Configuration of electrical heaters on in

heating

mode

Determines electrical heater operation in

heating

mode

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

35

Pa r04

Pa r05

Pa r06

Pa d02

Pa d03

Pa d04

Pa d05

Pa d06

Pa d07

Pa d08

Pa d09

Pa r07

Pa r08

Pa r09

Pa r10

Pa r11

Pa r12

Pa r13

Pa r14

Pa r15

Pa d01

Configuration parameters

0=off during

heating

1= on during

cooling

(in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)

Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probe

Configuration of electrical heater 2 control probe

Determines the control probes belonging to electrical heaters in

heating

mode

0= Not present

1=Control probe ST1

2=Control probe ST2

3= Control probe ST5

Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on

stand-by

Determines the status of electrical heaters when the instrument is OFF or on

stand-by

0=Always off when OFF or on

stand-by

1=On when OFF or on

stand-by

(in response to anti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm)

Set point

of anti-freeze electrial heater 1 in

heating

mode

Temperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in

heating

mode.

Set point

of anti-freeze electrical heater 1 in

cooling

mode

Temperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in

cooling

mode.

Maximum

set point

of anti-freeze electrical heaters

Determines the maximum setting of the anti-freeze electrical heater

set point

s.

Minimum

set point

of anti-freeze electrical heaters

Determines the minimumsetting of the anti-freeze electrcial heater

set point

s.

Anti-freeze heater

hysteresis

Anti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm

hysteresis

.

Set point

of external anti-freeze electrical heaters

Temperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters in the secondary circuit come on.

Set point

of electrical heater 2 in

heating

mode

Temperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in

heating

mode.

Set point

of electrical heater 2 in

cooling

mode

Temperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in

cooling

mode.

Enable

supplementary electrical heaters

DEFROST PARAMETERS

::

Defrost

enabled

0=

defrost

function enabled

1=

defrost

function disabled

Defrost start

temperature / pressure

Temperature/pressure below which the

defrost

cycle is started.

Defrost

interval (response time)

Duration for which probe remains below

defrost start

temperature/pressure, expressed in minutes.

Defrost end

temperature/pressure

Temperature/pressure above which

defrost end

s.

Maximum

defrost

time (time-out)

Maximum duration of

defrost

in minutes.

Compressor-

reversing valve

wait time (anti-bleeding)

Wait time between compressor going off and reversal of the 4-way valve at the beginning of the

defrost

cycle.

Drip time

Wait time at the end of the

defrost

cycle between the compressor going off and the reversal of the 4-way valve.

Temperature at which

defrost start

s if

Pa H49

= 1

Temperature below which the

defrost

cycle is started.

Temperature at which

defrost end

s if

Pa H49

=1

Temperature above which the

defrost

cycle is ended.

Par.

Pa H01

Pa H02

Pa H03

Pa H04

Pa H05

Pa H06

Pa H07

Pa H08

Pa H09

Pa H10

Pa H11

Pa H12

Pa H13

Pa H14

Pa H15

Pa H16

Pa H17

Pa H18

Pa H19

9.2 Parameters table

All ”

Energy 400

parameters

are listed in the table below.

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

*

Description

Maximum

set point

during

heating

Minimum

set point

during

heating

Maximum

set point

during

cooling

Minimum

set point

during

cooling

Number of circuits on machine

Number of

compressors

per circuit

Number of capacity steps per compressor

Compressors

on sequence

Circuit balancing

Presence of heat pump

Configuration ST1

Configuration ST2

Configuration ST3

Configuration ST4

Configuration ST5

Configuration ST6

Bottom of scale pressure value

Polarity ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4

Polarity ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8

Value Limits

H02

÷

90.0

-40.0 ÷ H01

H04

÷

90.0

-40.0 ÷ H03

0 ÷ 2

0

÷

4

0 ÷ 3

0

÷

1

0

÷

1

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

4

0 ÷ 3

0 ÷ 5

0

÷

3

0 ÷ 5

0

÷

3

0-350

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

1

Unit of meas.

°

C

° C

°

C

° C

Num

Num

Num

Flag

Flag

Flag

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

KPa*10

Flag

Flag

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

36

Alarm parameters

*

Pa A01

Pa A02

Pa A03

Pa A04

Pa A05

Pa A06

Pa A07

Pa A08

Pa A09

Pa A10

Pa A11

Pa A12

Pa A13

Pa A14

Pa H36

Pa H37

Pa H38

Pa H39

Pa H40

Pa H41

Pa H42

Pa H43

Pa H44

Pa H45

Pa H46

Pa H47

Pa H48

Pa H49

Pa H50

Pa H51

Pa H20

Pa H21

Pa H22

Pa H23

Pa H24

Pa H25

Pa H26

Pa H27

Pa H28

Pa H29

Pa H30

Pa H31

Pa H32

Pa H33

Pa H34

Pa H35

Pa H52

Pa H53

Pa H54

Pa H55

Pa H56

Pa H57

Pa H58

Pa H59

Pa H60

Pa H61

Pa H62

Pa H63

Pa H64

Pa H65

Pa H66

Pa H67

Offset of

dynamic set point

during

heating

Dynamic outdoor temp.

set point

during

cooling

Dynamic outdoor temp.

set point

during

heating

Delta dynamic outdoor temp.

set point

during

cooling

Delta dynamic outdoor temp.

set point

during

heating

Offset ST1

Offset ST2

Offset ST3

Offset ST4

Offset ST5

Offset ST6

0=50 Hz 1=60 Hz

0= °C 1=°F

Family serial address

Device serial address

User password

-12.7 ÷ 12.7

0

÷

255

0 ÷ 255

-12.7

÷

12.7

° C

°

C

° C

°

C

-12.7

÷

12.7

-12.7 ÷ 12.7

°

C

° C

-12.7

÷

12.7

°

C

-127 ÷ 127 ° C/10-Kpa*10

-12.7 ÷ 12.7

-12.7

÷

12.7

° C

°

C

-127 ÷ 127 ° C/10-Kpa*10

0

÷

1 Flag

Flag

Num.

Num.

Pa H68 Copy card

password

If

parameters

in this category are modified, the controller must be turned off and on again to ensure correct functioning.

Num.

Num.

ALARM PARAMETERS

0 ÷ 14

0

÷

14

0 ÷ 255

0 ÷ 255

Par.

Description Value Limits

Pa A15

Pa A16

Pa A17

Pa A18

Pa A19

Polarity ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4

Polarity ST1

Polarity ST2

Configuration ID1

Configuration ID2

Configuration ID3

Configuration ID4

Configuration ID5

Configuration ID6

Configuration ID7

Configuration ID8

Configuration ID9

Configuration ID10

Configuration ID11

Configuration ST4 if digital input

Configuration relay 2

Configuration relay 3

Configuration relay 4

Configuration relay 5

Configuration relay 6

Configuration relay 7

Polarity RL2

Polarity RL3

Polarity RL4

Polarity RL5

Alarm relay polarity

Configuration fan 1 output

Configuration fan 2 output

Free

Selection

of operating mode

Enable

dynamic set point

Offset of

dynamic set point

during

cooling

Low pressure switch bypass time after compressor on

Low pressure

Flow switch bypass time after pump on

Duration of active flow switch input

Duration of inactive flow switch input

Number of flow switch

Bypass compressor thermal switch from compressor on

Number of

alarms

Number of fan thermal switch alarm events/hour

Anti-freeze alarm bypass after ON-OFF

Anti-freeze alarm activation

Hysteresis alarm events per hour compressors alarm events per hour

1 + 2 thermal switch

set point

of anti-freeze alarm

Anti-freeze alarm events/hour

Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation

point

Analogue input high pressure

hysteresis

Analogue input low pressure activation bypass

Analogue input low pressure activation

set point

Analogue input low pressure

hysteresis

Analogue input low pressure

alarm events per hour

/hour

set

0 ÷ 11

0

÷

11

0 ÷ 11

0

÷

11

0

÷

11

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

1

0 ÷ 1

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

1

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

2

0

÷

1

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

1

-12.7 ÷ 12.7

0 ÷ 19

0

÷

19

0 ÷ 19

0

÷

19

0

÷

19

0 ÷ 19

0

÷

19

0 ÷ 11

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

1

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

19

0

÷

19

0 ÷ 19

0

÷

19

0 ÷ 19

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

÷

-127

0

0

0

÷

÷

÷

255

255

255

255

255

255

255

255

255

255

÷ 127

25.5

255

900

0 ÷ 255

0

÷

255

-500

0

0

÷

÷

÷ 800

255

255

Unit of measurement

Seconds

Num

Seconds

Seconds

Seconds

Num

Seconds

Num

Num

Minutes

° C

°

C

Num

° C/10 – Kpa*10

Flag

Flag

Flag

Num

Flag

Flag

Flag

° C

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

Flag

Flag

Flag

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

Flag

Flag

Flag

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

° C/10 – Kpa*10

°

°

Seconds

C/10 – Kpa*10

C/10 – Kpa*10

Num

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

37

Compressor parameters

Fan control parameters

Pump parameters

Electrical heater parameters

Par.

Pa F01

Pa F02

Pa F03

Pa F04

Pa F05

Pa F06

Pa F07

Pa F08

Pa F09

Pa F10

Pa F11

Pa F12

Pa F13

Pa F14

Pa F15

Pa F16

Pa F17

Pa F18

Pa F19

Pa F20

Pa F21

Pa F22

Pa F23

Pa F24

Pa F25

Pa A20

Pa A21

Pa A22

Pa A23

Pa A24

Pa A25

Pa A26

Par.

Pa C01

Pa C02

Pa C03

Pa C04

Pa C05

Pa C06

Pa C07

Pa C08

Par.

Pa P01

Pa P02

Pa P03

Par.

Pa r01

Pa R02

Pa r03

Pa r04

Pa r05

Pa r06

Pa r07

Pa r08

Pa r09

Pa r10

Pa r11

Pa R12

Pa r13

Pa r14

Machine out of coolant differential

Machine out of coolant bypass

Machine out of coolant duration

Machine out of coolant alarm triggered

Enable low pressure alarm during

defrost

Input over-temperature

set point

Input over-temperature duration

COMPRESSOR PARAMETERS

Description

ON-OFF safety time

ON-ON safety time

Hysteresis

regulation algorithm during

cooling

Hysteresis

regulation algorithm during

heating

Regulation algorithm step intervention delta

Compressor – compressor on interval

Compressor – compressor off interval

Capacity step on interval

FAN CONTROL PARAMETERS

Description

Fan output mode

Fan

pick-up

time

Fan

phase shift

Impulse duration

of triak on

Functioning in response to compressor request

Minimum speed during

cooling

Maximum silent speed during

cooling

Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

during

cooling

Prop. band during

cooling

Delta

cut-off

Cut-off hysteresis

.

Bypass time

cut-off

Max speed during

cooling

Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

during

cooling

Minimum speed during

heating

Maximum silent speed during

heating

Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

during

heating

Prop. band during

heating

Maximum fan speed during

heating

Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure

set point

during

heating

Preventilation in

cooling

mode

Combined or separate fan control

Fan activation temperature/pressure

set point

during defrosting

Fan activation

hysteresis

during defrosting

Preventilation after defrosting

PUMP PARAMETERS

Description

Pump operating mode

Delay between pump ON and compressor ON

Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFF

ELECTRICAL HEATER PARAMETERS

Description

Configuration of electrical heaters in

Configuration of electrical heaters on in

Configuration of electrical heaters on in

Set point

Set point

Max.

Min.

set point set point hysteresis

Set point

Set point

Set point

of electrical heater 1 in

of electrical heater 1 in

electrical heaters

electrical heaters

of anti-freeze heaters

of external anti-freeze electrical heaters

of electrical heater 2 in

of electrical heater 2 in

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

defrost heating cooling heating cooling

mode

cooling heating

mode

mode

mode

mode

mode

mode

Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probe

Configuration of electrical heater 2 control probe

Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on

STAND-BY

Value

0

0

0

0

0

÷

÷

÷

0

0

÷

÷

255

255

255

÷

÷

1

1

255

255

Limits

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

255

0

÷

255

Value Limits

0 ÷ 1

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

1

0 ÷ 6

0

÷

6

0

÷

1

Pr09 ÷ Pr10

Pr09

÷

Pr10

P r10 ÷ 127

-127 ÷ P r09

0

÷

25.5

Pr09 ÷ Pr10

Pr09

÷

Pr10

Pr09

÷

Pr10

°

°

C

Minutes

Minutes

Flag

Flag

C

S*10

Value

Value

Limits

0

÷

255

0 ÷ 255

0

÷

25.5

0

÷

25.5

0

÷

255

0 ÷ 255

0 ÷ 255

Unit of measurement

Seconds*10

Seconds*10

°

C

°

C

Seconds

Seconds

Seconds

Limits

0

÷

2

0

÷

255

0 ÷ 100

0

÷

255

0 ÷ 1

0 ÷ 100

Unit of measurement

Num.

Seconds/10

% uS*100

Flag

%

0

÷

100 %

-500 ÷ 800 ° C/10 — Kpa*10

0 ÷ 255

0 ÷ 255

0

÷

255

0 ÷ 255

°

°

°

C/10 — Kpa*10

C/10 — Kpa*10

C/10 — Kpa*10

Seconds

0

÷

100 %

-500

÷

800

°

C/10 — Kpa*10

0

÷

100

0 ÷ 100

%

%

-500

÷

800

°

C/10 — Kpa*10

0 ÷ 255

0

÷

100

° C/10 — Kpa*10

%

-500 ÷ 800 ° C/10 — Kpa*10

0 ÷ 255

0 ÷ 1

Seconds

Flag

-500

÷

800

°

C/10 — Kpa*10

0

÷

255

0 ÷ 255

°

C/10 — Kpa*10

Seconds

Unit of measurement

Flag

Seconds

Seconds

Unit of measurement

Flag

Flag

Flag

Num

Num

Flag

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

38

Defrost parameters

Extension parameters

Pa r15

Pa r16

Pa r17

Par.

Pa d01

Pa d02

Pa d03

Pa d04

Pa d05

Pa d06

Pa d07

Pa d08

Pa d09

Pa d10

Pa d11

Par.

Pa N01

Pa N02

Pa N03

Pa N04

Pa N05

Pa N06

Pa N07

Enable

supplementary electrical heaters

Delta of activation of supplementary heater 1

Delta of activation of supplementary heater 2

DEFROST PARAMETERS

Description

Defrost

enabled

Defrost start

temperature/pressure

Defrost

interval

Defrost end

temperature/pressure

Maximum

defrost

time

Compressor-

reversing valve

wait time

Drip time

Delay between defrosting of circuits

Output probe

defrost

circuit 1

Output probe

defrost

circuit 2

Delay in

compressors

on in

defrost

mode

EXTENSION PARAMETERS

Description

Polarity of ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15

Configuration ID12

Configuration ID13

Configuration ID14

Configuration ID15

Configuration relay 9

Configuration relay 10

Value

Value

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

25.5

0 ÷ 25.5

Flag

°C

°C

Limits Unit of measurement

0 ÷ 1 Flag

-500

÷

800

°

C/10 — Kpa*10

0 ÷ 255 Minutes

-500 ÷ 800 ° C/10 – Kpa*10

0

÷

255

0 ÷ 255

0

0

÷

÷

255

255

0 ÷ 8

0

÷

8

0 ÷ 255

Minutes

Seconds

Seconds

Seconds*10

Num

Num

Seconds

Limits

0 ÷ 1

0

÷

19

0

÷

19

0 ÷ 19

0

÷

19

0 ÷ 11

0 ÷ 11

Unit of measurement

Flag

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

Num

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

39

Alarms

Alarm events per hour

10 DIAGNOSTICS

x

Energy 400

” can perform full systems

diagnostics

and signal a series of

alarms

.

Alarm trigger and

reset

modes are set using

parameters Pa A01

Pa A26

.

For some

alarms

the signal will not be given for a certain amount of time, determined by a parameter.

For some

alarms

the number of alarm events is counted; if the number of alarm events in the past hour exceeds a certain threshold set by a parameter, the alarm will switch from automatic to

manual reset

.

Alarms

are sampled every 113 seconds;

Example: if the number of events/hour is set to 3, the duration of an alarm must fall between 2*113 seconds and 3*113 seconds for the alarm to be switched from automatic to

manual reset

.

Automatic reset Manual reset

Alarm sampling

Alarm

Counter

1

225 s 225 s

2

225 s

3

225 s

Time

If an alarm is triggered more than once within one sampling period (113 seconds), only one alarm will be counted.

Alarms

with

manual reset

are

reset

by pressing the ON-OFF button and releasing

Manual reset

shuts down corresponding

loads

and requires an operator to intervene (

reset

the alarm using the ON-OFF control).

Manual reset alarms

are used mainly to identify problems which could result in damage to the system

10.1 List of alarms

When an alarm is triggered, two things occur:

• The corresponding

loads

are shut down

The alarm appears on the

keyboard display

The alarm message consists of a code with the format “Enn” (where nn is a 2-digit number identifying the type of alarm, such as: E00, E25, E39….).

All possible

alarms

are listed in the table below, along with their codes and the corresponding

loads

that will be shut down:

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

40

Tabella Allarmi

CODE

E00

E01

E02

E03

E04

E05

E06

E07

MESSAGE

Remote off

High pressure circuit 1

Low pressure circuit 1

Thermal switch protection compressor 1

Thermal switch protection condenser fan circuit 1

Anti-freeze circuit 1

Probe ST2 fault

Probe ST3 fault

DESCRIPTION

All

loads

will be shut down;

• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Remote OFF”

(refer to

digital inputs

)

Compressors

in circuit 1 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure circuit 1” (refer to

digital inputs

)

Compressors

in circuit 1 will be shut down; also condenser fans if condensation is separate for the 2 circuits (refer to

combined or separate condensation

);

• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressure circuit 1” (refer to

digital inputs

);

• Automatically

reset

unless

alarm events per hour

reaches the value of parameter

Pa A02

, after which manually

reset

;

• Inactive during timer

Pa A01

after compressor on or reversal of 4-way valve (

reversing valve

) in circuit 1

Compressor 1 will be shut down;

• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch compressor 1” (refer to

digital inputs

);

• Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reaches the value of parameter

Pa A07

, after which manually

reset

;

• Inactive during timer

Pa A08

after compressor on.

Fans and

compressors

in circuit 1 will be shut down; if the 2 circuits are set up for combined condensation, (refer to

combined or separate condensation

)

compressors

in circuit 2 will also be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch fan circuit 1” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reaches the value of parameter

Pa A09

, after which manually

reset

;

Fans and

compressors

in circuit 1 will be shut down;

• Active if analogue probe ST2 (refer to

analogue inputs

) is configured as anti-freeze probe (

Pa H12

= 1);

• Triggered when probe ST2 detects a value lower than

Pa A11

;

Turned off if probe ST2 detects a value greater than

Pa A11

+

Pa A12

;

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reaches the value of parameter

Pa A13

,after which manually

reset

;

Inactive during timer

Pa A10

after

Energy 400

is turned on with the On-OFF key (refer to

keyboard

) or from the digital input ON-OFF (refer to

digital inputs

) or when

heating

mode is started.

All

loads

will be shut down;

• Triggered if probe ST2, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..

100°C).

All

loads

will be shut down;

• Triggered if probe ST3, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..

100°C).

COMP.1 COMP.2 COMP.3 COMP.4

FAN1

YES YES YES

LOADS

SHUT DOWN

YES YES

FAN2

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES1

YES1

YES1

YES1

YES

YES

YES1

YES1

YES1

YES

YES1

YES

YES

2

YES1

YES1

YES1

YES

YES

YES

2

YES1

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

2

2

2

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

41

PUMP

YES

RES.1

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

RES.2

YES

YES

YES

E08

E09

E13

E19

E21

E22

E23

E24

External circuit 1 antifreeze

High pressure compressor 1

Thermal switch protection compressor 2

High pressure compressor 2

High pressure circuit 2

Low pressure circuit 2

Thermal switch protection compressor 3

Thermal switch protection condenser fan circuit 2

Anti-freeze circuit 2

• Fans and

compressors

will be shut down;

Active if analogue probe ST3 (refer to

analogue inputs

) is configured as an external anti-freeze probe (

Pa H13

= 4);

Active when probe ST3 detects a value lower than

Pa A11

;

• Goes off if probe ST3 detects a value greater than

Pa A11

+

Pa A12

;

• Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reach the value of parameter

Pa A13

, after which manually

reset

;

• Inactive during timer

Pa A10

after

Energy 400

is turned on using the On-OFF key (refer to

keyboard

) or ON-OFF digital input (refer to

digital inputs

) or

heating

mode is switched on.

Compressor 1 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure compressor 1” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Always manually

reset

Compressor 2 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch compressor 2” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reach the value of parameter

Pa A07

, after which manually

reset

;

Inactive during timer

Pa A08

after compressor is turned on.

Compressor 2 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure compressor 1” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Always manually

reset

Compressors

in circuit 2 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure circuit 2” (refer to

digital inputs

)

Compressors

in circuit 2 will be shut down, as well as condenser fans if the 2 circuits have separate condensation (refer to

combined or separate condensation

);

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressure circuit 2” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reaches the value of parameter

Pa A02

, after which manually

reset

;

Inactive during timer

Pa A01

after compressor on or reversal of

4-way valve (

reversing valve

) of circuit 1

Compressor 3 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch compressor 3” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reach value of parameter

Pa A07

, after which manually

reset

;

Inactive during timer

Pa A08

after compressor on.

Fans and

compressors

in circuit 2 will be shut down; if the 2 circuits have combined condensation (refer to

combined or separate condensation

) the

compressors

in circuit 1 will also be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch circuit

2 fan” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reaches value of parameter

Pa A09

, after which manually

reset

;

Fans and

compressors

will be shut down;

YES

YES

YES2

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

YES

YES

YES

YES2

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

42

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES2

YES2

YES

YES2

YES

YES

E26

E27

E08

E29

E33

E39

E40

E41

Probe ST5 fault

Probe ST6 fault

External circuit 2 antifreeze

High pressure compressor 3

Thermal switch protection compressor 4

High pressure compressor 4

Probe ST1 fault

Flow switch

Active if analogue probe ST5 (refer to

analogue inputs

) is configured as anti-freeze probe (

Pa H15

= 1);

Triggered when probe ST5 detects a value below

Pa A11

;

Turns off when probe ST5 detects a value above

Pa A11

+

Pa

A12

;

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reaches value of parameter

Pa A13

, after which manually

reset

;

Inactive during timer

Pa A10

after turning on

Energy 400

using

On-OFF key (refer to

keyboard

) or digital input ON-OFF

(refer to

digital inputs

) or start of

heating

mode.

All

loads

will be shut down;

Triggered if probe ST5, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

All

loads

will be shut down;

Triggered if probe ST6, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

• Fans and

compressors

will be shut down;

Active if analogue probe ST6 (refer to

analogue inputs

) is configured as an external anti-freeze probe (

Pa H13

= 4);

Active when probe ST6 detects a value lower than

Pa A11

;

• Goes off if probe ST6 detects a value greater than

Pa A11

+

Pa A12

;

• Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reach the value of parameter

Pa A13

, after which manually

reset

;

• Inactive during timer

Pa A10

after

Energy 400

is turned on using the On-OFF key (refer to

keyboard

) or ON-OFF digital input (refer to

digital inputs

) or

heating

mode is switched on.

Compressor 3 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure compressor 3” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Always manually

reset

Compressor 4 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch compressor 4” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reaches the value of parameter

Pa A07

, after which manually

reset

;

Inactive during timer

Pa A08

after compressor on.

Compressor 4 will be shut down;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure compressor 4” (refer to

digital inputs

);

Always manually

reset

All

loads

will be shut down;

Triggered if probe ST1, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

All

compressors

, fans and pump will be cut off if manually

reset

;

Triggered if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (refer to

digital inputs

) remains active for an amount of time equal to

Pa A04

;

Goes off if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (refer to

digital inputs

) remains inactive for an amount of time equal to

Pa A05

;

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

43

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

SI

3

YES YES

E42

E45

E46

Probe ST4 fault

Configuration error

Automatically

reset

until

alarm events per hour

reaches the value of parameter

Pa A06

, after which manually

reset

;

Inactive during timer

Pa A03

following pump on.

All

loads

will be shut down;

Triggered if probe ST4, configured as an analogue input, shorts, is cut off, or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..

100°C).

All

loads

will be shut down;

Triggered if at least one of the following conditions apply:

H11= 2 (ST1 configured as request for

heating

), H12= 2 (ST2 configured as request for

cooling

) and both inputs are active.

Sum of

compressors

and capacity steps on machine exceeds 4

The

keyboard

is declared present (Pa H69=1) and there is no communication between the

keyboard

and the basic unit.

All

loads

will be shut down except the pump;

Triggered if probe ST1 (refer to

analogue inputs

) has a value exceeding

Pa A25

for an amount of time exceeding Pa 26 in

cooling

mode;

Goes off if probe ST1 (refer to

analogue inputs

) has a value lower than

Pa A25

Pa A12

;

Automatically

reset

.

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES YES YES YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES YES YES

YES YES YES

YES YES

1

If it belongs to circuit 1

2

If combined condensation system

3

Only if

manual reset

e

outputs

defined as capacity steps will go off if there is an alarm for the compressor to which they belong

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

44

The tables below list

alarms

by type (digital or analogue).

Digital alarms

TABLE OF

DIGITAL ALARMS

:

Alarm name Bypass trigger event Bypass time Trigger duration

None absent absent Compressor 1,2,3,4 high pressure alarm

High pressure circuit alarm

Low pressure alarm

None absent

Pa A01

absent absent

Flow switch alarm

Compressor 1,2,3,4 thermal switch alarm

Fan 1,2 thermal switch alarm

A compressor coming on in the circuit or reversal of 4-way valve

Pump coming on

Compressor coming on

None

Pa A03

Pa A07

absent

Pa A04

absent absent

TABLE OF

ANALOGUE ALARMS

:

Deactivation duration

absent absent absent

Pa A05

absent absent

N. alarm events/hour

Manual reset

Manual reset

Pa A02

Pa A06

Pa A08

Pa A09

Analogue alarms

External anti-freeze alarm circuit 1

External anti-freeze alarm circuit

2

Low pressure

/low temperature condensation alarm circuit

1

Low pressure

/low temperature condensation alarm circuit

2

High pressure

/high temperature condensation alarm circuit

1

Alarm name Event

Anti-freeze alarm circuit

1

Anti-freeze alarm circuit

2

On Off, input in

heating

mode, remote on off

On Off, input in

heating

mode, remote on off

On Off, input in

heating

mode, remote on off

On Off, input in

heating

mode, remote on off

Compressor turned on or reversal of 4way valve

Bypass time

Pa A10

Pa A10

Pa A10

Pa A10

Trigger

set point

Pa A11

Pa A11

Pa A11

Pa A11

Par A16

Pa A17

Compressor turned on or reversal of 4-

3way valve

None

Par A16 absent

Pa A17

Pa A14

absent

Pa A14

High pressure

/high temperature condensation alarm circuit

2

High temperature regulation algorithm alarm*

None

None absent

Pa A25

Hysteresis

N. alarm events/hour

Pa A12

positive

Pa A13

Regulation probe

ST2 if configuration parameter

Pa

H12

= 1, otherwise alarm is inactive

Pa A12

positive

Pa A13

Pa A12

positive

Pa A12

positive

Pa A18

positive

Pa A13

Pa A13

Pa A19

ST5 if configuration parameter

Pa

H15

= 1, otherwise alarm is inactive

ST3 if configuration parameter

Pa

H13

= 4, otherwise alarm is inactive

ST6 if configuration parameter

Pa

H16

= 4, otherwise alarm is inactive

ST3 se

Pa H13

=1 or 2 or else ST4 if

Pa H14

= 1, otherwise alarm is inactive

Pa A18

positive

Pa A19

ST6 if

Pa H16

is inactive

=1, otherwise alarm

Pa A15

negative

Manual reset

ST3 if

Pa H13

=1 or 2, or ST4 if

Pa

H14

= 1; otherwise alarm is inactive

Pa A15

negative

Manual reset

ST6 if

Pa H16

=1 or 2, otherwise alarm is inactive

Pa A12

negative

Automatic

reset

ST1

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

45

x

11 TECHNICAL FEATURES

11.1 Technical data

Power supply voltage

Power supply frequency

Power

Insulation class

Protection grade

Operating temperature

Operating humidity (non-condensing)

Storage temperature

Storage humidity (non-condensing)

Typical

12V~

50Hz/60Hz

5VA

1

Front panel

IP0

25°C

30%

25°C

30%

Min.

10V~

0°C

10%

-20°C

10%

Max.

14V~

60°C

90%

85°C

90%

11.2 Electromechanical features

110/230 V digital

outputs

Analogue

outputs

Analogue inputs

Digital inputs

Terminals and connectors

Serial ports n ° 8 5 A resistive relays; ¼ hp 230VAC; 1/8 hp 125VAC n° 2 triac piloting

outputs

or configurable 4-20 mA

outputs

n° 1 4-20 mA output n ° 4 NTC R

25

10K Ω

N° 2 configurable input or 4-20mA o r NTC R

25

10K

Ω n ° 11 voltage-free

digital inputs

10m A n

°

1 10-way high voltage connectors, step 7.5

n ° 2 16-way rapid clamp connectors for low voltage, step 4.2, AWG 16-28 n

°

1 p2.5 5–way connector for remote control and programming with external

copy card

, AWG 24-30 n

°

1 20-way connector for connection of

extension

n ° 1 3-way screw terminal for

remote keyboard

n° 1 9600 serial port n° 1 2400 serial port

current transformer

The instrument must be powered with a suitable

current transformer

with the following features:

Primary voltage:

• Secondary voltage:

Power supply frequency:

• Power:

230V~-15%

12V~

50Hz; 60Hz

5VA;

÷

+6%; 110V~±10%

11.3 Regulations

The product complies with the following European Community Directives:

Council Directive 73/23/CEE and subsequent modifications

Council directive 89/336/CEE and subsequent modifications

and complies with the following harmonised

regulations

:

LOW VOLTAGE: EN60730

EMISSION: EN50081-1 (EN55022)

IMMUNITY: EN50082-1 (IEC 801-2,3,4)

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

46

x

12 USE OF THE DEVICE

12.1 Permitted use

This product is used to control single and dual circuit chillers and heat pumps.

To ensure safety, the controller must be installed and operated in accordance with the instructions supplied, and access to high voltage

components

must be prevented under regular operating conditions. The device shall be properly protected against water and dust and shall be accessible by using a tool only. The device is suitable for incorporation in a household appliance and/or similar air conditioning device.

According to the reference

regulations

, it is classified:

• In terms of construction, as an automatic electronic control device to be incorporated with independent assembly or integrated;

• In terms of automatic operating features, as a type 1 action control device, with reference to manufacturing tolerances and drifts;

• As a class 2 device in relation to protection against electrical shock;

As a class A device in relation to software structure and class.

12.2 Forbidden use

Any use other than the

permitted use

is forbidden.

Please note that relay contacts supplied are functional and are subject to fault (in that they are controlled by an electronic component and be shorted or remain open); protection devices recommended by product standards or suggested by common sense in response to evident safety requirements shall be implemented outside of the instrument.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

47

13 RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKS

x

Microtech shall not be held liable for any damage incurred as a result of:

installation

/use other than those intended, and, in particular, failure to comply with the safety instructions specified by applicable

regulations

and/or provided in this document;

• use with equipment which does not provide adequate protection against electric shocks, water and dust under the effective conditions of

installation

;

• use with equipment which permits access to hazardous parts without the use of tools;

installation

/use with equipment which does not comply with current

regulations

and legislation.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

48

OR logico

Scroll up

Stand-by

Reset

Reset alarm

Manual reset

Scroll down

BLINK

Average number of hours

Loads

Set Point

Range

Hysteresis

Permanent memory

Cut-off

14 GLOSSARY

x

Multiple inputs with an OR relationship to one another are equivalent to a single input with the following status:

• Active if at least one input is active

Inactive if no input is active

To “

Scroll up

” a menu means listing the various

parameters

from the bottom up (Pa10 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 08 ….)

Indicates that the instrument is waiting, in

stand-by

mode; all

functions

are suspended.

Set to zero.

Resetting an alarm means reactivating it ready for a new signal.

A

manual reset alarm

must be

reset

using the

keyboard

.

To “

Scroll down

” in a menu is to list

parameters

from the top down (Pa08 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 10 ….)

Means flashing; normally refers to leds

Average number of hours

is the ratio between the total number of hours for which the

compressors

are available and the number of

compressors

in the circuit

Devices in the system, including

compressors

, fans,

hydraulic pump

, electrical anti-freeze heaters…

A reference value (set by the user) defining the system’s operating status, such as the thermostat that controls temperature in the home: if we want to maintain a temperature of 20 °C we set the

set point

to 20°C (the

heating

system will come on if the temperature in the house falls below 20°C, and go off if it exceeds this value).

Values falling within a given interval;

Range

1…100 indicates all values between 1 and 100

A

hysteresis

is normally defined around a

set point

to prevent frequent oscillation of the change of status of the load being controlled;

Example: suppose we have a

set point

of 20 °C on a probe for measurement of room temperature, above which a compressor will be started up;

When room temperature nears the

set point

(20 °C) there will be an unstable phase during which the relay which starts up the compressor will frequently switch from ON to OFF and vice versa, which could result in serious damage to the system.

To prevent this problem a

hysteresis

is defined: an interval of tolerance within which there will be no change in status; in our example, we could set a

hysteresis

of 1 °C, in which case the compressor would be started up at 21 °C (

set point

+

hysteresis

) and turned off at 19 °C (

set point

hysteresis

)

Memory in which data is maintained even when the device is turned off (as distinct from temporary memory, the data in which is lost when the device is turned off.)

Temperature/pressure below or above which proportional output is cut off.

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

49

15 ANALITIC INDEX

A

Alarm events per hour

………………………………….40

Alarm parameters

………………………………………..37

Alarms

…………………………………………………………..40

Analogue alarms

………………………………………….45

Analogue inputs

…………………………………………….6

configuration table …………………………………7 resolution and precision……………………………7

Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control

……………………………………………………….27 diagram……………………………………………………..27

Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters

…………………………………………………………………..19

configuration………………………………………….19 probe configuration…………………………………19

Average number of hours

…………………………….49

B

BLINK

…………………………………………………………….49

C

CF (Control Fan) Modules

……………………………..5

Combined or Separate Condensation

…………26

Components

……………………………………………………5

Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences

…………………………………………………………………..16

Compressor configuration

……………………………15

Simple

compressors

…………………………………15 with 1 capacity step…………………………………15 with 2 or 3 capacity steps………………………..15

Compressor control – regulation algorithm

.23

Cooling

diagram……………………………………..23

Heating

diagram……………………………………….24

Compressor parameters

……………………………….38

Compressor timing

……………………………………….17

Off-on and on-on diagram for 1 compressor …………………………………………..17

Off-on timing ……………………………………………17 on-on and off-off diagram 2 comp………..18

On-on off-off times for 2 comp……………..17

On-on timing…………………………………………….17

Compressor timing:

………………………………………18

Compressors

………………………………………………….15

coming on on the basis of hours of

operation and circuit balancing …….16

coming on on the basis of hours of

operation and circuit saturation ……16

unvaried on sequence with circuit

balancing …………………………………………….17

unvaried on sequence with circuit

saturation ……………………………………………17

Condensation fan

…………………………………………18

Condensation fan control

…………………………….24

Cool mode ………………………………………………..24

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

Heat mode ………………………………………………. 25

Condensation-Defrost probes

…………………….. 19

probe configuration…………………………….. 20

separate or combined condensation .. 20

Configuration of analogue inputs

…………………6

Configuration of digital inputs

………………………8

Configuration of fan outputs

…………………………9

Configuration of outputs

……………………………….9

Configuration parameters

………………………….. 36

Connection diagrams

……………………………………..6

Control during defrost

………………………………… 29

Compressors

…………………………………………….. 29

Fans ………………………………………………………….. 29

Reversing valve

………………………………………… 29

Cooling

………………………………………………………… 21

Copy Card

…………………………………………………5; 14

Cross references

………………………………………………4

current transformer

…………………………………….. 46

Cut-off

…………………………………………………………. 49

D

Defrost

…………………………………………………………. 28 compressor management ………………………. 28

Defrost end

………………………………………………….. 29 diagram ……………………………………………………. 30

Parameter configuration………………………… 29

Defrost parameters

……………………………………… 39

Defrost start

………………………………………………… 28 diagram ……………………………………………………. 29

Setting timer to zero………………………………. 28

Stopping timer………………………………………… 28

Description of Parameters

………………………….. 31

Device off

……………………………………………………… 21

DIAGNOSTICS

……………………………………………… 40

Differential temperature control

………………… 24

Digital alarms

……………………………………………… 45

Digital inputs

………………………………………………….8

Configuration Table…………………………………8 polarity………………………………………………………..8

Polarity table ………………………………………………8

Display

…………………………………………………………. 10

Drip time

……………………………………………………… 29

Dynamic Set point

………………………………………. 21

Control

parameters

………………………………… 22

Modification depending on current input with negative offset……………………………. 22

Modification depending on current input with positive offset……………………………… 22

Modification depending on outdoor temperature with negative offset……… 23

Modification depending on outdoor temperature with positive offset………. 22

50

E

Electrical heater parameters

……………………….38

Electromechanical features

………………………….46

Energy 400

………………………………………………………5

Extension

…………………………………………………………5

Extension parameters

…………………………………..39

F

Fan configuration

…………………………………………18

selection

of output type…………………………..18

Fan control configuration

……………………………18

Fan control in cool mode diagram……………………………………………………..25

Fan control in heat mode diagram……………………………………………………..25

Fan control parameters

……………………………….38

Forbidden use

……………………………………………….47

FUNCTIONS

…………………………………………………..28

G

GLOSSARY

……………………………………………………..49

H

Heating

………………………………………………………….21

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

…………………………4

Hydraulic pump

……………………………………………19

Hydraulic pump control

……………………………….26 diagram……………………………………………………..26

Hysteresis

………………………………………………………49

I

Icons for emphasis:

…………………………………………4

Impulse duration

………………………………………….18

INSTALLATION

……………………………………………….6

Internal fan

…………………………………………………..19

INTRODUCTION

……………………………………………..5

K

Keyboard

……………………………………………………….10

Keyboards

……………………………………………………….5

Keys

……………………………………………………………….10

Mode …………………………………………………………10

L

Led

…………………………………………………………………10

List of alarms

………………………………………………..40

Load control

………………………………………………….23

Loads

……………………………………………………………..49

Low voltage outputs

………………………………………9

M

Manual reset

…………………………………………………49

Menu structure

……………………………………………..13

O

Operating modes

………………………………………….21 configuration table…………………………………..21

OR logico

………………………………………………………49

Outputs

…………………………………………………………..9

P

Parallel electrical heaters

…………………………….27

Param Manager

……………………………………………..5

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

PARAMETERS

………………………………………………. 31

Parameters table

…………………………………………. 36

Permanent memory

…………………………………….. 49

Permitted use

………………………………………………. 47

Phase shift

……………………………………………………. 18

Physical quantities and units of measurement

…………………………………………………………………….9

Pick-up

…………………………………………………………. 18

Power outputs

…………………………………………………9

Configuration table…………………………………….9

Polarity Table……………………………………………9

Power step

……………………………………………………. 15

Programming parameters – Menu levels

…… 11

Pump parameters

……………………………………….. 38

R

Range

…………………………………………………………… 49

Recording hours of operation

…………………….. 28

References

……………………………………………………….4

Regulation algorithm in cool mode

…………… 23

Regulation algorithm in heat mode

………….. 23

Regulations

………………………………………………….. 46

Remote keyboard

………………………………………… 11

Reset

…………………………………………………………….. 49

Reset alarm

………………………………………………….. 49

RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKS

……… 48

Reversing valve

……………………………………………. 19

Reversing valve control

……………………………….. 27

Reversing valves

…………………………………………… 19

S

Safety timing

……………………………………………….. 17

Scroll down

………………………………………………….. 49

Scroll up

………………………………………………………. 49

selection

………………………………………………………….9

Serial Interface (EWTK)

…………………………………..5

Serial outputs

………………………………………………….9

Set Point

………………………………………………………. 49

Setting set points

………………………………………… 21

Stand-by

…………………………………………………21; 49

SUMMARY

………………………………………………………2

Supplementary electrical heaters

………………. 27

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

………………………….. 15

T

Tabella Allarmi

……………………………………………. 41

Technical data

…………………………………………….. 46

TECHNICAL FEATURES

………………………………… 46

TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

……… 21

U

Unit of measurement:

…………………………………….9

USE OF THE DEVICE

…………………………………….. 47

USER INTERFACE

…………………………………………. 10

V

Visibility of parameters and submenus

……… 14

W

Wall-mounted keyboard

…………………………….. 11

51

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing

52

Microtech s.r.l.

via dell’Industria, 15

Zona Industriale Paludi

32010 Pieve d’Alpago (BL)

ITALY

Telephone +39 0437 986444

Facsimile +39 0437 986163

Email [email protected]

Internet http:/www.microtech.com

An Invensys company

Page 1: Microtech Energy 400

electronic controller for Chiller/Heat pump up to 4 steps

technical user manual

ENERGY 400 -PRELIMINARY-

Page 2: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 2

1 SUMMARY

1 SUMMARY …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………22 How to use this manual ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..43 Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………5

3.1 Components …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 53.1.1 Energy 400 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.2 Extension……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………53.1.3 Keyboards………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53.1.4 CF (Control Fan) Modules…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.5 Copy Card………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.7 Param Manager ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5

4 Installation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..64.1 Connection diagrams…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 64.2 Configuration of analogue inputs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 64.3 Configuration of digital inputs……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 84.4 Configuration of outputs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9

4.4.1 Power outputs………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….94.4.2 Low voltage outputs ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..94.4.3 Serial outputs…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9

4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9User Interface…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………10

5.1 Keys………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..105.2 Display …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10

5.2.1 Display……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..105.2.2 Led……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10

5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………115.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels……………………………………………………………………………………………………………115.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus………………………………………………………………………………………………………………14

5.5.1 Copy Card……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….14

6 System configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………..156.1 Compressors ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….156.2 Compressor configuration……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………15

6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….166.2.2 Compressor timing ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..17

6.3 Condensation fan………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….186.3.1 Fan configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..186.3.2 Fan control configuration ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..18

6.4 Reversing valves…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.5 Hydraulic pump…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters …………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.7 Internal fan……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………196.8 Condensation-Defrost probes……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..19

7 Temperature control functions………………………………………………………………………………………….217.1 Setting set points ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….217.2 Dynamic Set point ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..217.3 Load control ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….23

7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithm ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..237.3.2 Condensation fan control ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..247.3.3 Combined or Separate Condensation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….267.3.4 Hydraulic pump control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………267.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..277.3.6 Reversing valve control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..27

8 Functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………288.1 Recording hours of operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………28

Page 3: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 3

8.2 Defrost …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..288.2.1 Defrost start …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..288.2.2 Control during defrost……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….298.2.3 Defrost end …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….29

9 Parameters ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………319.1 Description of Parameters ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………319.2 Parameters table…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..36

10 Diagnostics ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4010.1 List of alarms…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………40

11 Technical features…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….4611.1 Technical data………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4611.2 Electromechanical features ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….4611.3 Regulations……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………46

12 Use of the device ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4712.1 Permitted use ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..4712.2 Forbidden use………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47

13 Responsibility and residual risks ………………………………………………………………………………………..4814 Glossary……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………49

Page 4: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 4

2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUALx

This manual is designed to permit quick, easy reference with the following features:

References column:A column to the left of the text contains references to subjects discussed in the text to help you locate the information youneed quickly and easily.

Cross references:All words written in italics are referenced in the subject index to help you find the page containing details on this subject;supposing you read the following text:”when the alarm is triggered, the compressors will be shut down”The italics mean that you will find a reference to the page on the topic of compressors listed under the item compressorsin the index.If you are consulting the manual “on-line” (using a computer), words which appear in italics are hyperlinks: just click on aword in italics with the mouse to go directly to the part of the manual that discusses this topic.

Some segments of text are marked by icons appearing in the references column with the meanings specified below:

Take note: information on the topic under discussion which the user ought to keep in mind

Tip: a recommendation which may help the user to understand and make use of the information supplied onthe topic under discussion.

Warning! : information which is essential for preventing negative consequences for the system or a hazard topersonnel, instruments, data, etc., and which users MUST read with care.

References

Cross references

Icons foremphasis:

Page 5: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 5

3 INTRODUCTIONx

Energy 400 is a compact device that permits control of air conditioning units of the following types:• air-air• air-water• water-water• motor-condensing

The controller can manage machines with up to four power steps distributed in a maximum of 2 cooling circuits (forexample, 2 circuits, with 2 compressors per circuit).

Main characteristics:• Outflowing water temperature control• Condensation control• 2 inputs which may be configured for NTC or 4-20mA (through parameters)• 11 configurable digital inputs + (4 four optional)• Dynamic set point• Setting of parameters from the keyboard, with a personal computer or with a interface module• Remote keyboard (100 m) which may be connected up directly without serial interfaces.• 3 4-20 mA outputs• Control of 1, 2, 3, or 4 compressors.

3.1 Components

We will now look at the basic components and accessories in the system and how they are connected.

3.1.1 Energy 400The basic module is an electronic card for connection with I/O resources and a CPU as described in the section onconnection diagrams.

3.1.2 ExtensionThe basic module is an electronic card for connection as described in the section on connection diagrams.

3.1.3 KeyboardsTwo types of keyboard are available:• TS-P: Panel keyboard (32×74)• TS-W: Wall-mounted keyboard

3.1.4 CF (Control Fan) ModulesUsed to connect fans with Energy 400 low voltage outputs.

3.1.5 Copy CardCan be used to upload and download the Energy 400 parameter map.

3.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK)A device which permits the controller to interface with a Personal Computer

It must be connected up as illustrated in the figure

The PC must be connected with the interface module, and the interface module with the device, with no poweron to any of the devices, and in compliance with current safetyregulations . Be careful to avoid electrostaticshocks, especially on exposed metal parts of the devices; allow electrostatic shocks to discharge into the groundbefore handling.

3.1.7 Param ManagerIf you have an adequate Personal Computer with Windows 95 or a more recent operating system, the Param Managersoftware, an adequate interface module and proper wiring, you can have full control over all Energy 400 parameters viaPersonal Computer.The instrument can be programmed easily and quickly using a series of interfaces which permit a logical, guided approach.

Page 6: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 6

4 INSTALLATIONx

Before proceeding with any operation, first make sure that you have connected up the power supply to thedevice through an appropriate external current trransformer.Always follow these rules when connecting boards to one another and to the application:Never apply loads which exceed the limits set forth in these specifications to outputs;Always comply with connection diagrams when connecting up loads;To prevent electrical couplings, always wire low voltage loads separately from high voltage loads;

4.1 Connection diagrams

Basic module

Detail of connectors

Instrument configuration is determined by the values of the parameters associated with inputs and outputs.

4.2 Configuration of analogue inputs

There are 6 analogue inputs:• 4 NTC transducers,• 2 configurable NTC/4-20mA transducers.

Analogue inputs

Page 7: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 7

The following devices shall henceforth be referred to by the codes ST1….ST4:ST1 – Temperature control probe: inflowing water or air, reading range : -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST2 – Configurable probe, reading range: -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST3 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mAST4 — Configurable probe, reading range : -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST5 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mAST6 — Configurable probe, reading range: -30°C ÷ 90°C;

4 analogue inputs are available on the extension which is not used in this release.The resolution of NTC analogue inputs is one tenth of a Kelvin degree;They are precise to within 0.8°C within the range of 0÷35°C and to within 0.8°C ÷ 3°C in the remainder of the scale.The 4-20mA input is precise to within 1% FS, with a resolution of one tenth of a Kelvin degree, if the input is configured asa dynamic set point, or Kpa*10 if the input is configured as a pressure probe.

ST1-ST6 probes can be configured according to the following table:

Value Pa. Description 0 1 2 3 4 5

H11 Configuration ofanalogue inputST1

Probeabsent

NTC input inflowingwater or air

Digital inputrequest forheating

Digital inputrequest fortemperaturecontrol

DifferentialNTC input

Not permitted

H12 Configuration ofanalogue inputST2

Probeabsent

NTC inputoutflowingwater/air,anti-freeze

Digital inputrequest forcooling

Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted

H13 Configuration ofanalogue inputST3

Probeabsent

NTC inputcondensation

4…20 mAcondensationinput

4…20 mAinput fordynamic setpoint

NTCantifreeze forwater-watergas reversalmachines

NTC heatingcontrol forwater-waterwater reversalmachines

H14 Configuration ofanalogue inputST4

Probeabsent

NTC inputcondensation

Multifunctional digital input

NTC input foroutdoortemperature

Not permitted Not permitted

H15 Configuration ofanalogue inputST5

Probeabsent

NTC inputoutflowingwater/air

Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted

H16 Configuration ofanalogue inputST6

Probeabsent

NTC inputcondensationcircuit 2

4-20mA inputcondensation

Not permitted Antifreezeinput forwater-watergas reversalmachines

Not permitted

If inputs ST3 and ST6 are defined as 4-20mA inputs under pressure, the scale bottom value of the pressure input is alsosignificant:Pa H17= Maximum input value; set the corresponding value to a current of 20 mA

Analogue inputs:resolution and

precision

Analogue inputs:configuration

table

Page 8: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 8

4.3 Configuration of digital inputs

There are 11 voltage-free digital inputs, which will henceforth be identified as ID1….ID11.ST1, ST2, and ST4 may be added to these if they are configured as digital inputs (through parameters Pa H11, Pa H12, PaH14). 4 more digital inputs are available on the extension.

The polarity of digital inputs is determined by the parameters listed below:ID1, ID2, ID3, ID4 defined by parameter Pa H18,ID5, ID6, ID7, ID8 defined by parameter Pa H19ID9, ID10, ID11, ST4 (if configured as digital) defined by parameter Pa H20ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15 on extension defined by parameter Pa N01

ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4

Pa H18Pa H19Pa H20Pa H21 ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15

0 Closed Closed Closed Closed1 Open Closed Closed Closed2 Closed Open Closed Closed3 Open Open Closed Closed4 Closed Closed Open Closed5 Open Closed Open Closed6 Closed Open Open Closed7 Open Open Open Closed8 Closed Closed Closed Open9 Open Closed Closed Open10 Closed Open Closed Open11 Open Open Closed Open12 Closed Closed Open Open13 Open Closed Open Open14 Closed Open Open Open15 Open Open Open Open

Example: A value of “10” for parameter Pa H18 indicates that digital inputs ID1 and ID3 are active when their contacts areclosed and digital inputs ID2 and ID4 are active when their contacts are open:

Pa H18 ID1 ID2 ID3 ID410 Closed Open Closed Open

If ST1 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H21If ST2 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H22

Parameter Value Description

0 Active if closed1 Active if open

All digital inputs are configurable and may be given the meanings listed below by setting parameters Pa H23 through PaH34 and Pa N02 through Pa N05

Parameter Value Description

0 Input disabled1 Flow switch2 Remote OFF3 Remote Heat/Cool4 Thermal switch compressor 15 Thermal switch compressor 26 Thermal switch compressor 37 Thermal switch compressor 48 Thermal switch fan circuit 19 Thermal switch fan circuit 210 High pressure circuit 111 High pressure circuit 212 Low pressure circuit 113 Low pressure circuit 214 High pressure compressor 115 High pressure compressor 216 High pressure compressor 317 High pressure compressor 418 End of defrost circuit 119 End of defrost circuit 2

In the case of multiple inputs configured with the same value, the function associated with the input will carry out aLogical OR among the inputs.

Digital inputs

Digital inputs:polarity

Digital inputs:Polarity table

Digital inputs:Configuration

Table

Outputs

Page 9: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 9

4.4 Configuration of outputs

There are two basic types of outputs: power outputs, and low voltage outputs.

4.4.1 Power outputsThere are 8 power outputs, which shall henceforth be referred to as RL1…RL8 (relays).RL1 — compressor 1, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL2 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL3 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL4 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL5 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL6 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL7 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL8 – cumulative alarm, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

There are 2 additional digital outputs in the extension module:RL9 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL10 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

Configurable outputs may be given the following meanings by setting parameters Pa H35 through Pa H40 and Pa N06through Pa N07

Value Description0 Disabled1 Reversal valve circuit 12 Reversal valve circuit 23 Condenser fan circuit 14 Condenser fan circuit 25 Electrical heater 16 Electrical heater 27 Pump8 Evaporator fan9 Power Step 210 Power Step 311 Power Step 4

Polarity of RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5,RL8 may be selected using Pa H41-Pa H45

Parameter Value Description

0 Relay closed if output active1 Relay open if output not active

If multiple outputs are configured with the same resource, the outputs will be activated in parallel.

4.4.2 Low voltage outputsThere are a total of 4 low voltage outputs available: 2 phase cut outputs and 2 4-20 mA outputs:TK1 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 1.TK2 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 2.AN1 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 1AN2 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 2

Outputs AN1 and AN2, though their connections are physically separate, are alternatives to outputs TK1 and TK2 which areselected by parameters Pa H45 and Pa H46

Fan config. parameter Index Value 0 Value 1

Fan 1 output H45 Fan 1 output in phase cut Fan 1 output in 4-20 mAFan 2 output H46 Fan 2 output in phase cut Fan 2 output in 4-20 mA

4.4.3 Serial outputsThere are 2 asynchronous serials on the control:• channel for serial communication with a personal computer through a Microtech interface module• channel for serial communication with a standard Microtech keyboard. Power supply 12 VDC (2400,e,8,1).

4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement

Parameter Pa H64 may be used to set temperature display in either degrees °C or degrees °F:

Pa H64 Unit ofmeasurement

0 Degrees °C1 Degrees °F

Configurationtable

Polarity Table

Configuration offan outputs

Unit ofmeasurement:

selection

Page 10: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 10

5 USER INTERFACEx

The interface on the front panel of the instrument can be used to carry out all the operations connected to the use of theinstrument, and in particular to:• Set operating mode• Respond to alarm situations• Check the state of resources

Front panel of the instrument

The instrument can function without the aid of a keyboard

5.1 Keys

Selects operating mode:

If the heating mode is enabled, each time the key is pressed the following sequence occurs:Stand-by -àà cooling àà heating àà stand-by

if heating mode is not enabled:Stand-by àà cooling àà stand-by

In menu mode, this key acts as a SCROLL UP or UP key (increasing value).

Resets alarms, and turns the instrument on and off.

Press once to reset all manually reset alarms not currently active; all the alarm events per hour will also be reset even if thealarms are not active.Hold down the key for 2 seconds to turn the instrument from on to off or vice versa. When it is off, only the decimal pointremains on the display. In menu mode this key acts as a SCROLL DOWN or DOWN key (decreasing value).

Pressing the “mode” and “on-off” keys at the same time:

If you press both keys at the same time and then release within 2 seconds, you will move one level deeper in the displaymenu.If you press both keys for more than 2 seconds you will move one level up.If you are currently viewing the lowest level in the menu and you press both keys and release within 2 seconds, you will goup one level.

5.2 Display

The device can communicate information of all kinds on its status, configuration, and alarms through a display and anumber of leds on its front panel.

5.2.1 DisplayNormal display shows:• regulation temperature in tenths of degrees celsius or fahrenheit• the alarm code, if at least one alarm is active. If multiple alarms are active, the one with greater priority will be

displayed, according to the Table of Alarms.• If temperature control is not analogue and depends on the status of a digital input (ST1 or ST2 configured as digital

inputs), the “On” or “Off” label will be displayed, depending on whenther temperature control is active or not.• When in menu mode, the display depends on the current position; labels and codes are used to help the user identify

the current function.

5.2.2 LedLed 1 compressore 1.ON if compressor 1 is active• OFF if compressor 1 if off• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if compressor is currently set to defrost

Power step 2 ledON if power step 2 is active

Keyboard

Mode

Page 11: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 11

• OFF if power step 2 is not active• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if step 2 is currently defrosting

Led step 3 di potenzaON se lo step 3 di potenza è attivo• OFF se lo step 3 di potenza non è attivo• BLINK veloce se sono in corso temporizzazioni di sicurezza• BLINK lento se step 3 in sbrinamento

Power step 4 led• ON if power step 4 is active• OFF if power step 4 is not active• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if step 4 is defrosting

Electrical heater/boiler led• ON if at least one internal anti-freeze electrical heater or boiler is enabled• OFF if both are off

Heating Led• ON if the device is in heating mode.

Cooling Led• ON if the controller is in cooling mode

If neither the HEATING led nor the COOLING led are in, the controller is in STAND-BY mode.When it is off, only the decimal point appears on the display .

5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard

The remote keyboard a on the display is an exact copy of the information displayed on the instrument, with the same leds;Remote keyboard

It performs exactly the same functions as those described in the display section.The only difference is in use of the UP and DOWN keys (to increase and decrease value), which are separate from theMODE and ON/OFF keys.

5.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels

Device parameters may be modified using a Personal Computer (with the required software, interface key and cables), orusing the keyboard;If using the keyboard, access to parameters is arranged in a hierarchy of levels which may be accessed by pressing the“mode and “on-off” keys at the same time (as described above).Each menu level is identified by a mnemonic code which appears on the display.The structure is set up as shown in the diagram below:

Remote keyboard

Page 12: Microtech Energy 400

Page 13: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 13

Menu structure

Control probeCurrent alarm

Set point:

Analogue Inp.:

Alarms:

Digital input:

Op. hours:

Password:

Parameters:

Label cooling set:

Label heating set:

Input code.: —

Current alarms Code:

Input code: —

Value heating set

Value cooling set

Configuration par.:

Compressor par.:

Fan control par.:

Alarms par.:

Pump par.:

Antifreeze par.:

Defrost par.:

Par. index —

Parameter value

Number of hours par.

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Comp. hours: —

Password value

Status of digital input

Val. analogue input

Par. index —

Par. index —

Par. index —

Par. index —

Par. index —

Par. index —

Pump hours: Number of hours par.

Page 14: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 14

5.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus

With a personal computer, interface key, suitable cables and the “Param Manager” software, it is possible to restrict thevisibility and modification of parameters and entire submenus.A “visibility value” may be assigned to each parameter, as described below:

Value Meaning0003 Parameter or label visible at all times0258 Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password = Pa

H46)0770 Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password = Pa

H46). Parameter cannot be modified.0768 Parameter visible from PC only.

Some visibility settings are factory set.For more information, please refer to the “ Param Manager” instructions.

5.5.1 Copy Card

The copy card can store the whole map of Energy 400 parameters;To download the map present in the copy card, proceed as follows:1. Connect the key to the appropriate Energy 400 output (refer to connection diagrams) while the device is off.2. Turn on the Energy 400 : the parameters map in the copy card will be copied to the Energy 400.

To store the Energy 400 parameters map in memory, proceed as follows:1. Connect the copy card to the appropriate Energy 400 output (refer to connection diagrams) while the device is on.2. From the keyboard, access the “password” submenu (refer to menu structure) and set the value contained in

parameter Pa H46: The instrument’s map will be downloaded to the copy card.3. Disconnect the copy card when finished.

Page 15: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 15

6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONx

In this section we will look at how to configure parameters for various loads on the basis of the type of installation to becontrolled.

6.1 Compressors

Energy 400 can control systems consisting of up to two cooling circuits with 1 to 4 compressors.If there is a capacity step, it will be considered as a compressor.Each compressor is piloted by a device relay (power outputs) (each capacity step requires an additional output).The first compressor must be connected to output RL1; the remaining outputs (RL2…RL7) (RL9…RL10 on extension) may beassigned at will, setting the value of the parameters Pa H35 …. PaH40 (Pa N06 … Pa N07 if there is no extension).The compressors will be turned on or off depending on the temperatures detected and the temperature control functionsthat have been set (refer to the section on Compressor controls – Regulation algorithml )

6.2 Compressor configuration

The turning on of an additional compressor (or capacity step) will henceforth be referred to as a Power step (power level).

The following configurations are available for compressors without capacity steps:

Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1) 2 (Pa H06=2) 3 (Pa H06=3) 4 (Pa H06=4)

1(Pa

H05=1)

RL1=comp. 1 circ.1 RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2circ.1Step3 = comp 3circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1Step3 = comp 3 circ.1Step4 = comp 4 circ.1

Num

ber o

f circ

uits

2(Pa

H05=2)

RL1=Comp. 1 circ.1Step3 = comp. 1 circ.2

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1Step3 = comp 1 circ.2Step4 = comp 2 circ.2

Configuration error Configuration error

The following configurations are available for compressors with 1 capacity step (Pa H07=1):

Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1) 2 (Pa H06=2)

1(Pa

H05=1)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1Step3 = comp.2 circ.1Step4 = cap. step1 Comp.2 circ.1

Num

ber o

f circ

uits

2(Pa

H05=2)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step3 = comp.1 circ.2Step4 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.2

Configuration error

The following configurations are available for compressors with 2 or 3 capacity steps (Pa H07=2 or Pa H07=3):

Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1 and Pa H07=2) 2 (Pa H06=2 and Pa H07=3)

1(Pa

H05=1)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step4 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step3 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1Step4 = cap. step3 comp.1 circ.1

Num

bero

of c

ircui

ts

2(pa

H05=2)

Configuration error Configuration error

Power step

Simplecompressors

with 1 capacitystep

with 2 or 3capacity steps

Page 16: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 16

6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequencesDepending on the temperature conditions detected by the probes, the temperature control functions of the “Energy 400”may request turning on and off of compressors/capacity steps (power steps).The sequence in which compressors/capacity steps (steps) are turned on and off may be determined by adjusting thevalues of parameters Pa H08 and Pa H09 as described below:

Parameter valuePar Description 0 1

Pa H08 Power step on sequence Depends on number of hours ofoperation

Unvaried on sequence

Pa H09 Circuit balacing Circuit saturation Circuit balancing

When on sequences depend on the number of hours of operation, of 2 available compressors, the one which has beenoperated for less hours will come on first, and the one which has been operated for more hours will always go off first. Inan unvaried on sequence, the compressor with the lower number will always come on first (compressor 1 beforecompressor 2) and the compressor with the higher number will always go off first.

The circuit balancing parameter is significant only if there are 2 circuits and 2 steps per circuit. If we select H09=0, allpower steps in one circuit will come on before those in the other circuit. If H09=1 (balancing), power steps will come on insuch a way that both circuits are delivering the same power, or the difference is no more than one step.

Let us take a closer look at the various combinations:

Pa H08=0 Pa H09=0CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER

CIRCUIT:CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUIT:

The compressor with the least hours of operation comes onfirst, then the capacity step for the same circuit, thecompressor on the other circuit, and, lastly, its capacity step.When turning off, the capacity step of the compressor withthe most hours of operation goes off first, then thecorresponding compressor, then the other capacity step andfinally the other compressor.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2Ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep4ààRL1ààStep2and go off in this orderStep2ààRL1ààStep4ààStep3

If all compressors are off to start with, the circuit which hasthe lower average number of hours for all its compressorswill come on first. In this circuit the compressor with theleast hours of operation will come on first, followed by theother compressor in the same circuit: thus the circuit issaturated. The next step is chosen between the twocompressors in the other circuit with fewer hours.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2Ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2hours comp.4 > hours comp.3(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 +hours comp.3)/2 they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep4ààStep2ààRL1and go off in this orderRL1ààStep2ààStep4ààStep3

Pa H08=0 and Pa H09=1CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER

CIRCUIT:CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUIT

The compressor with the least hours of operation comes onfirst, followed by the compressor in the other circuit, thecapacity step of the first circuit to come on, and, lastly, theother capacity step. When going off, the capacity step of thecompressor with the most hours goes off first, followed bythe capacity step of the other compressor, the compressorwith the most hours and, lastly, the remaining compressor.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2they will come on in this orderStep3ààRL1ààStep4ààStep2and go off in this orderStep2ààStep4ààRL1ààStep3

If all compressors are off to start with, the circuit with thelower average number of hours for its compressors will comeon first. The average is calculated as the ratio between thetotal number of hours of the compressors available and thenumber of compressors in the circuit. In this circuit, thecompressor with the least hours will come on first, then thecompressor in the other circuit with the least hours, theother compressor in the first circuit and, lastly, theremaining compressor.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as followsRL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2hours comp.4 > hours comp.3(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 +hours comp.3)/2 they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep2ààStep4ààRL1and go off in this orderRL1ààStep4ààStep2ààStep3

Compressors:coming on on thebasis of hours of

operation andcircuit saturation

Compressors:coming on on thebasis of hours of

operation andcircuit balancing

Page 17: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 17

Pa H08=1 and Pa H09=0CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUITThe compressor con with the lower number comes on first,then its capacity step, then the compressor in the othercircuit and, lastly, its capacity step. The capacity step for thecompressor with the highest number is the first to go off,followed by the capacity step of the other compressor, andfinally the compressor.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2they will come on in this orderRL1ààStep2ààStep3ààStep4and go off in this orderStep4ààStep3ààStep2ààRL1

Exactly the same as the first case.

Pa H08=1 e Pa H09=1CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUITThe compressor with the lowest number comes on first,then the compressor in the other circuit, the capacity stepof the first compressor and then the capacity step of thesecond compressor. They go off in reverse order.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2they will come on in this orderRL1ààStep3ààStep2ààStep4and go off in this orderStep4ààStep2ààStep3ààRL1

Exactly the same as the first case.

In the unvaried sequence, if the compressor with the lower number is unavailable, the compressor with the higher numbercomes on.If the compressor comes available and the amount of power required is equal to the amount of power being delivered,the machine will continue to function in its current state: it will not turn off a compressor with a higher number to turn ona compressor with a lower number.

A compressor is unavailable when it is shut down due to an alarm or is currently counting safety timing.

6.2.2 Compressor timingThe turning on and off of compressors must comply with safety times which may be set by the user using the parametersspecified below:

There is a safety interval between the time a compressor goes off and the time the same compressor comes back on(compressor on…off safety time, controlled by parameter Pa C01);This interval of time must elapse when the “Energy 400” is turned on.

There is a safety interval between the time a compressor is turned on and the time it is turned on again (compressoron…on safety time, controlled by parameter Pa C02) .

If the machine has multiple power steps, there are intervals of time which must pass between turning on of 2 compressors(Pa C06) and turning off of 2 compressors (Pa C07). An amount of time determined by parameter Pa C08 (capacity step ondelay) must elapse between the turning on of one compressor or capacity step and the turning on of any other

Compressors:unvaried on

sequence withcircuit saturation

Compressors:unvaried on

sequence withcircuit balancing

Safety timing

Off-on timing

On-on timing

Off-on and on-ondiagram for 1

compressor

On-on off-offtimes for 2 comp.

Compressor

ON

OFF

OFF – ON safety timePa C01

Seconds*10

ON – ON safety timePa C02

Page 18: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 18

compressor or capacity step on the machine. The greatest of the currently active safety times must be applied to eachcompressor.The off time interval between compressors is not applied in the event of a compressor shutdown alarm, in which casethey stop immediately.

6.3 Condensation fan

“Energy 400” may be connected with two types of fan piloting unit:

• Triak• 4-20 mA

6.3.1 Fan configurationFirst of all, correctly configure the type of analogue output (low voltage outputs) to which the fan control module(s) areconnected;the relevant parameters are Pa H45 for the first circuit and Pa H46 for the second circuit, as shown in the table below:

Parameter value Circuit 1 – Pa H45 Circuit 2 – Pa H460 TK output enabled for phase

cutTK output enabled for phasecut

1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN2

If the output is configured as a proportional triac, the parameters PICK-UP, PHASE SHIFT, and IMPULSE DURATION are alsosignificant.

Every time the external fan is started up, power is supplied to the exchanger fan at maximum voltage, and the fan operatesat maximum speed, for an amount of time equal to Pa F02 seconds; after this time the fan operates at the speed set bythe regulator.Pa F02 = Fan pick-up time (seconds)

Determines a delay during which it is possible to compensate the different electrical characteristics of the fan drivemotors:Pa F03 = duration of fan phase shift expressed as a percentage.

Determines the duration of the TK output piloting impulse in microseconds*10Pa F04= triak piloting impulse duration

6.3.2 Fan control configurationThe fan control may be configured to supply a proportionate output (0-100%) or to function as “ON OFF” by setting thevalue of the parameter Pa F01:

Pa F01 = Selection of control output typePa F01 = 0 proportionate fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on

parameters)Pa F01 = 1 fan “on-off” output; in this mode the control performs the same

calculations as in proportionate output, but if the outcome isgreater than 0, the control output will be 100.

Pa F01 = 2 on-off operation as called by compressor. In this mode output is 0if no compressor is on in the circuit, or 100% if at least onecompressor in the circuit is on

on-on and off-offdiagram 2 comp

Pick-up

Phase shift

Impulse duration

Fan configuration:selection ofoutput type

Comp.1

ON

OFF

Interval betweenturning offcompressors Pa C07

Seconds

Interval between turning oncompressors Pa C05

Comp.2ON

OFF

Seconds

Page 19: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 19

If some of the relays are configured as condensation fan outputs (Pa H35- Pa H40 and Pa N06- Pa N07=3 or 4), they willbe on if the control output for each fan is greater than 0; otherwise, they will be off.

6.4 Reversing valves

The reversing valve is used only when operating in “heat pump” mode.“Energy 400” can control up to 2 reversing valves in a dual circuit system.

The reversing valve in circuit 1 is active only if:• a relay (power output) is configured as reversing valve for circuit 1 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 1).

The reversing valve in circuit 2 is active only if:• a relay (power output) is configured as reversing valve for circuit 2 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 2)• there are 2 circuits

Both of them will be active only ifthe heat pump is in operation (Pa H10=1 )

6.5 Hydraulic pump

The hydraulic pump is active only if at least one relay (power output) is configured as pump output (Pa H35-Pa H40 or PaN06-Pa N07= 7 ) .

The pump may be configured to function independently of the compressor or whenever called up using parameter Pa P01 :

Pa P01 = Pump operating mode0=continuous operation1=operation when called up by regulation algorithm

with a flow switch alarm (table of alarms) which is active with automatic reset, the pump will be on even if the compressisoff.

6.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters

“Energy 400” can control up to 2 anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters.

The electrical heater output is active only if the relays (power outputs) are configured as electrical heaters 1 or 2 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06-Pa N07= 5 or 6) .If configured in this way, the outputs will command the electrical heater to come on or go off, depending on theparameters of configuration of electrical heaters Pa R01 … Pa R06, as described below:

ValueParameter Description0 1

Pa R01 Defrost configuration comes on only when requested bycontrol

always on during defrost

Pa R02 Cooling modeconfiguration

off during cooling on during cooling (depending on anti-freeze electrical heater control)

Pa R03 Heating modeconfiguration

off during heating on during heating (depending on anti-freeze electrical heater control)

Pa R06 OFF or STAND-BYconfiguration

off when OFF or on STAND-BY Electrical heaters on when OFF or onSTAND-BY

Parameters r04 and r05 determine which probe the electrical heaters will control.Each of the two electrical heaters may be set to any one of probes ST1, ST2 or ST5.If the is absent or configured as a digital input, the electrical heaters will always be off.

Pa r04 configuration probe set to electrical heater 1Pa r05 configuration probe set to electrical heater 2

ValueParameters

Description

0 Electrical heater off1 Set to ST12 Set to ST23 Set to ST5

6.7 Internal fan

The fan output will be active only if one relay is configured as evaporator fan output.The output is ON if at least one compressor is ON; otherwise it is off. During defrost the output is always off.

6.8 Condensation-Defrost probes

“Energy 400” can control defrosting of one or more circuits depending on system configuration.

Defrost is enabled if:• stated by the “Enable defrost” parameter (Pa d01 = 1)

Reversing valve

configuration

probeconfiguration

Page 20: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 20

• the condensation probe for circuit 1 is present (connected to analogue input ST3) and the relative parameter Pa H13= 1 (in the case of an NTC probe) or Pa H13 = 2 (in the case of a 4-20mA probe) and ST4 = 1

• the reversing valve is present

In the case of a dual circuit system, defrost may be separate or combined (this will be the case of a system with a singlecondenser) depending on the setting of the parameterPa F22 : condensation type

0 1Pa F22: condensation type Separate condensers Combined condensation

Defrost end and start depends on the values of the condensation probes, which may be configured as follows:

Let SCC1 be the condensation probe of circuit 1; it may be connected to analogue input ST3 or ST4;depending on the type of probe, the configuration will be as shown in the table below:

Probe connectionProbe type Probe connected to

ST3Probe connected toST4

SCC1 NTC type Pa H13 = 1 Pa H14 = 1SCC1 4-20mA type Pa H13 = 2 —

The following table applies to a dual circuit system:

1 circuit 2 circuits, separatedefrost

2 circuits, combineddefrost (*)

Defrost circuit 1 SCC1 SCC1 MIN(SCC1;ST6)Defrost circuit 2 — ST6 MIN(SCC1;ST6)

(*) If A and B are control probes, MIN(A;B) representsthe smaller of A and B, if A and B are declared present.It will be value A if B is not declared present.It is impossible for A not to be declared present.

separate orcombined

condensation

probeconfiguration

Page 21: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 21

7 TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONSx

Once ”Energy 400” has been configured, loads may be controlled on the basis of temperature and pressure conditionsdetected by probes and temperature control functions which may be defined using the appropriate parameters.

There are 4 possible operating modes:• cooling• heating• stand-by• off

Cooling: this is the “summer” operating mode; the machine is configured for cooling.

Heating: this is the “winter” operating mode; the machine is configured for heating.

Stand-by: the machine does not govern any temperature control function; it continues to signal alarms

Off: machine is turned off.

The operating mode is determined by settings entered on the keyboard and by the following

Parameters:Configuration parameter ST1 (Pa H11) ( refer to Analogue inputs: configuration table)Configuration parameter ST2 (Pa H12) ( refer to Analogue inputs: configuration table)Operating mode selection parameter (Pa H49)Heat pump parameter (Pa H10 )

Operating mode selection parameter (Pa H49)0= Selection from keyboard1= Selection from digital input (refer to digital inputs)

Heat pump parameter (Pa H10)0 = Heat pump not present1 = Heat pump present

Combinations of these parameters will generate the following rules:

Operating mode Mode selectionparameterPa H49

Configurationparameter ST1Pa H11

Configurationparameter ST2Pa H12

Mode selection from keyboard 0 Other than 2 Other than 2Mode selection from digital input. 1 Other than 2 Other than 2If input ST1 is on, operating mode is heating; ifnot, stand-by

Any 2 Other than 2

If input ST2 is on, operating mode is cooling; ifnot, stand-by

Any Other than 2 2

If input ST1 is on, operating mode is heating; ifinput ST2 is on, operating mode is cooling; if ST1and ST2 are both on, there is a control error; ifneither is on, operating mode is stand-by

Any 2 2

7.1 Setting set points

Unless the machine is configured as a motor condenser, loads will come on and go off dynamically depending on thetemperature control functions set, the temperature/pressure values detected by the probes, and the set points that havebeen set:

There are two set point values:Cooling Set point: this is the set point used as a reference when the device is in cooling modeHeating Set point: this is the set point used as a reference when the device is in heating mode

The set points may be modified from the keyboard by accessing the “SET” submenu (refer to menu structure).

Their values must fall within a range determined by parameters Pa H02 – Pa H01 (Heating) and Pa H04 – Pa H03 (Cooling).

7.2 Dynamic Set point

The regulation algorithm may be used to modify the set point automatically on the basis of outdoor conditions.This modification is achieved by adding a positive or negative offset value to the set point, depending on:• 4-20 mA analogue input (proportionate to a signal set by the user)or• temperature of outdoor probe

This function has two purposes: to save energy, or to operate the machine under particularly harsh outdoor temperatureconditions.

The dynamic set point is active if:• Activation parameter Pa H50 = 1

Operating modes

Cooling

Heating

Stand-by

Device off

Operating modes:configuration

table

Page 22: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 22

• Probe ST3 (analogue inputs) is configured as a dynamic set point input (Pa H13 = 3) or probe ST4 (analogue inputs) isconfigured as an outdoor probe (Pa H14 = 3)

Parameters for control of the dynamic set point:• Pa H51= max. offset during cooling.• Pa H52= max. offset during heating• Pa H53= Outdoor temperature set point during cooling• Pa H54= Outdoor temperature set point during heating• Pa H55= Delta of cooling temperature• Pa H56= Delta of heating temperature

The interaction of these parameters is illustrated in the graphs below:

Positive Offset (H32>0 or H33>0)

Negative Offset (H32<0 or H33<0)

Positive Offset

Controlparameters

Modificationdepending on

current input withpositive offset

Modificationdepending on

current input withnegative offset

Modificationdepending on

outdoortemperature with

positive offset

OffsetSet point

Current20 mA4 mA

Maxoffset

Current

20 mA4 mA

Maxoffset

Temp.

Delta <0

Outdoor temp. setpoint (H53 orH54)

Delta >0

Page 23: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 23

Offset Negativo

7.3 Load control

We will now look at how to set parameters for load control on the basis of temperature/pressure conditions detected byprobes.

7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithmThe regulation algorithm calculates the load to be supplied through the compressors for both heating and cooling.

REGULATION ALGORITHM IN COOL MODEIf probe ST2 (analogue inputs) is not configured as a digital input for requests for cooling (Pa H11=2) or probeST1(analogue inputs) as a digital input for regulation algorithm requests (Pa H12=3), compressor management willdepend on ambient temperature and a SET POINT.

ST1 = temperature of inflowing water or inlet airSET COOL= cooling set point set from keyboard.Pa C03 = hysteresis of cooling thermostatPa C05 = delta of power step intervention

If Pa H011 = 3, the power step requested will depend on the status of input ST1 (analogue inputs).If Pa H012 = 2, the power step requested will depend on the status of input ST2 (analogue inputs).If probe ST5 (analogue inputs) is configured as a second step request (Pa H15 =2), the second step (power step) will berequested on the basis of this input. This function will be active only if either Pa H11=3 or Pa H12=2.Only motor condensers may be controlled, up to 2 steps only.

REGULATION ALGORITHM IN HEAT MODEIf probe ST1(analogue inputs) is not configured as a digital input for requests for heat (Pa H05=2) or digital input forrequests for regulation algorithm (Pa H05=3), compressor management will depend on• temperature ST3 (analogue inputs), if configuration parameter ST3 = 5 (for water/water manual reversal machines)• otherwise, temperature ST1(analogue inputs)• a HEATING set point which may be set from the keyboard

ST1/ST3 =Temperature of inflowing water or inlet air

Modificationdepending on

outdoortemperature with

negative offset

Regulationalgorithm in cool

mode

Cooling diagram

Regulationalgorithm in heat

mode

Temp.

Delta <0

Outdoor temp. setpoint. (H53 orH54)

Delta >0

Power

1st step

ST1Pa C03 Pa C03

2nd step

Pa C05 Pa C05 Pa C05

Pa C03 Pa C03

3rd step

4th step

Page 24: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 24

HEATING SET = Heating set point that has been setPa C04 = Heating thermostat hysteresisPa C05 = Delta of step intervention

If Pa H11 = 2-3, the compressors will be turned off and on depending on the status of input ST1.If probe ST5 (analogue inputs) is configured as a second step request (Pa H15 =2), the second step (power step) will berequested depending on this input. This function will be active only if Pa H11=2,3 or Pa H12=2.

DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLThis function may be used to control temperature according to both ST1(analogue inputs) and ST4 (analogue inputs). Thefunction will be active• if ST1 is configured as differential NTC input (Pa H11 = 4)• if ST4 is configured as outdoor temperature input (Pa H14 = 3)

In this case, the controller will not control on the basis of ST1, but on the basis of the difference between ST1-ST4; ifconfiguration parameter ST3 is equal to 5 (for water/water machines with manual reversal) in heating mode the controllerwill always control on the basis of ST3.Differential temperature control can be used, for instance, to maintain a constant difference in temperature between theoutdoor environment and a liquid being heated or cooled.

A compressor will always be off if:• It is not associated with a relay (power output)• The compressor has been shut down (refer to table of alarms)• Safety timing is in progress• The time lapse between pump on and compressor on is in progress (safety timing)• Preventilation is in progress in cooling mode• Energy 400 is in stand-by or off mode• The parameter for configuration of probe ST1 Pa H11 = 0 (probe absent)

7.3.2 Condensation fan controlCondensation control is dependent on the condensation temperature or pressure for the circuit.Fan control will be on if:• at least one probe per circuit is configured as a condensation probe (pressure or temperature); if not, the fan for the

circuit will come ON and go OFF in response to the circuit compressors.

Fan control may be independent of the compressor, or it may be carried out in response to requests from compressors;Operating mode is determined by parameter Pa F05:

Value0 1

Pa F05:fan output mode

if all compressors in the circuit are off,the fan is off

condensation control is independentof the compressor

The cut-off is bypassed for an amount of time equal to Pa F12 after the compressor is turned on. If the control requestscut-off during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.

If parameter Pa F05 is set to 1, condensation control will be dependent on condensation temperature or pressure,depending on how the following parameters are set:

CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL IN COOL MODEPa F06 = Minimum fan speed in COOL mode;Pa F07 = Maximum silent fan speed in COOL modePa F08 = Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in COOL modePa F09 = Fan prop. band in COOL mode

Heating diagram

Differentialtemperature control

Cool mode

Power

1st step

Pa C03 Pa C03

2nd step

Pa C05 Pa C05

Pa C03 Pa C03

3rd step

4th step

ST1/ST3

Page 25: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 25

Pa F10 = Fan cut-off deltaPa F11 = Cut-off hysteresis.Pa F13 = Maximum fan speed in COOL modePa F14 = Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in COOL modeAn example of interaction of these parameters is shown in the figure below:

Fan control in cool mode

In cooling mode only, if Pa F05= 0 (if the compressor is turned off the fan is off), parameter Pa F21 (preventilation timefor outdoor fan) is active.Before turning on the compressors in the circuit the fan must be turned on for an amount of time equal to Pa F25; fanspeed is proportionate to condensation temperature, but if the control requests cut-off during this time period the fan willrun at the minimum speed setting.

This parameter prevents the compressor from starting up with a condensation temperature that is too high.

CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL IN HEAT MODEPa F15 = Minimum fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F16 = Maximum silent fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F17 = Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in HEAT mode;Pa F18 = Fan prop. band in HEAT mode;Pa F10 = Fan cut-off delta;Pa F11 = Cut-off hysteresis;Pa F19 = Maximum fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F20 = Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in HEAT mode.An example of interaction of these parameters is shown in the figure below:

Fan control in heat mode

Fan control in coolmode: diagram

Heat mode

Fan control inheat mode:

diagram

Page 26: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 26

If circuit is in defrost mode, the fan is OFF.

The cut-off is bypassed for an amount of time equal to Pa F12 after the compressor is turned on. If the control requests cut-off during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.

The fan will always be off if: there is an alarm indicating that a condensation fan has shut down (refer to table of alarms).Energy 400 is on stand-by or off.

7.3.3 Combined or Separate CondensationParameter Pa F22 may be used to configure a dual circuit machine with a combined condenser.

Value0 1

Pa F22:condensation type

separate condensers combined condenser

If Pa F22 = 0 the two fans are independent and are controlled by condensation pressure/temperature and the status of thecompressors in the circuits.If Pa F22= 1 the outputs of the 2 fans are in parallel and will be controlled as follows:by the greater of the condensation probes in the circuits in cooling modeby the smaller of the condensation probes in the circuits in heating mode

If one of the 2 circuits does not have a condensation probe a configuration alarm will be generated (refer to table ofalarms).

7.3.4 Hydraulic pump controlIf the pump is configured for continuous operation (Pa P01 = 0) it will stay on at all times; if not (Pa P01 = 1) it will beturned on in response to a request from the regulation algorithm.

Interaction between the pump, the compressors and the regulation algorithm status is determined by the followingparameters:

• Pa P02: Delay between pump on and compressors on.• Pa P03: Delay between regulation algorithm off and pump off.

An example is provided in the diagram below:

Errore. Il collegamento non è valido.

During a defrost, when the compressor is off, the pump will stay on.

The pump will go off if:• There is a pump shut-down alarm, such as a flow switch alarm requiring manual reset (refer to table of alarms)

diagram

Reg. algorithm

Compressor

ON

OFF

Pump

ON

OFF

Time

TimeDelay between compressor offand pump offPa P03

Delay between pump onand compressor onPa P02

ON

OFFTime

Page 27: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 27

• The instrument is on stand-by or off (it goes off after the delay determined by Pa P03)

7.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater controlEnergy 400 can control 2 anti-freeze electrical heaters;Each electrical heater is controlled with its own set point, which is different for heating and cooling modes, by means ofthe following parameters :• Pa r07 : set point of electrical heater 1 in heating mode• Pa r08 : set point of electrical heater 1 in cooling mode• Pa r13 : set point of electrical heater 2 in heating mode• Pa r14 : set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling mode

The two set points of the anti-freeze electrical heaters fall within a maximum and a minimum value which the user may setin the form of the following parameters:• Pa r09 : maximum set point for anti-freeze electrical heater• Pa r10 : minimum set point for anti-freeze electrical heater

When off or on stand-by. control is based on the cooling set point and the control probe used in heating mode.

Parameter Pa R11 determines hysteresis around the set points for the anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters.

An example of operation is shown in the diagram below

Diagram illustrating anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters control

PARALLEL ELECTRICAL HEATERSParameter r12 enables the parallel electrical heaters function..

This function is useful if the system incorporates 2 hydraulic circuits, each with its own anti-freeze probe, and there is onlyone anti-freeze electrical heater.

The following conditions must apply for the function to be active:

• Pa r12 = 1• Pa r05 other than 0• Pa r06 other than 0.

Control is based on the minimum value detected by the 2 probes, using the set points of electrical heaters 1 (Pa r07 andPa r08)

If Pa r15= 1 the electrical heaters have a dual function, as anti-freeze electrical heaters and supplementary electricalheaters. If Pa r15 = 1 and the system is in heating mode., electrical heater 1 will start up under the command of its owncontrol or if ST1 <(SET HEATING-Pa r14) while heater 2 ) will start up if ST1 <(SET HEATING-Pa r15) . The control hysteresisis Pa C04 (heating control hysteresis).

7.3.6 Reversing valve controlThe reversing valves are turned off if Energy 400 is off or on stand-by;The valves are ON in cooling mode and OFF in heating and defrost modes.

diagram

Parallel electricalheaters

Supplementaryelectrical heaters

Page 28: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 28

8 FUNCTIONSx

8.1 Recording hours of operation

The devices stores the number of hours of operation of the following in permanent memory:• hydraulic pump• compressors.

It is precise to within one minute.Hours of operation may be displayed by entering the appropriate menu with the label Ohr (refer to menu structure).The whole value is displayed if it is less than 999 hours; if it exceeds this value, the hundreds of hours will be shown andthe decimal point will appear:For example, 1234 hours will be displayed as follows:

To set the number of hours to zero, hold the DOWN key (refer to keys) down for two seconds while displaying the numberof hours of operation.

In the event of a power failure, the latest fraction of an hour recorded is set to 0, so that duration is rounded down:

8.2 Defrost

The defrost function is active in heating mode only.It is used to prevent ice formation on the surface of the external exchanger, which can occur in locations with lowtemperatures and high humidity and will considerably reduce the machine’s thermodynamic performance, creating a riskof damage to the machine.

Defrost start and end depends on the condensation probe values (refer to condensation probes– defrost) and the settingsof the parameters listed below:

8.2.1 Defrost startThe defrost starts as a result of three parameters:• Pa d02 : temperature/pressure at which defrost starts• Pa d03 : defrost interval

When the probe detects temperature/pressure values below the value of parameter Pa d02 it starts the timer, and whenthe number of minutes determined by parameter Pa d03 has expired the defrost will start;

The timer will stop if:• Temperature/pressure rises above the value of parameter Pa d02• The compressor is turned offThe timer will be set to zero if:• a defrost cycle is completed• “Energy 400” is turned off• operating mode is changed (refer to operating modes)• temperature rises above the value of parameter Pa d04 (defrost end temperature/pressure)

During the defrost the compressors are handled as follows:• combined defrost: all compressors are turned on at full power;• separate defrost: all compressors in the circuit being defrosted are turned on at full power;there may be a delay between compressor coming on and Defrost start imposed by parameter Pa d11

Defrost will take place only if the following conditions are met: :• The safety timing of compressors in the circuit must be 0• The delay between circuit defrosts must have expired since the last circuit defrost (Pa d08)

On a dual circuit machine with combined defrost, the following condition must apply:• in the circuit for which defrost start is not requested, compressor safety time = 0 (refer to safety timing) so that the

two circuits may both start a defrost at the same time.

If at the time of defrost start the compressor-4-way valve delay time Pa d06 = 0, the compressor will stay on; if not, theadjustment shown in the diagram below will be carried out.

Stopping timer

Setting timer tozero

Defrost:compressor

management

MEMORY

35.48

MEMORY

35

Power failure

Page 29: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 29

8.2.2 Control during defrostDuring the defrost cycle loads are controlled as described below:

compressors in the circuit for which defrost is underway will be turned on to full power, if not already on at full power

The reversing valve in the circuit for which defrost is underway will behave the way it does in the summer cycle.When the valve is reversed, a timer begins counting the minimum by-pass time for the circuit involved, equal to “minimumby-pass time during cooling” (Pa A01).

If the condensation pressure detected falls below (Pa F23 — Pa F24), the fan will be OFF; if it exceeds Pa F23, the fan will beON. At the end of the drip stage, if parameter Pa D07 is not 0 the fans will operate at full speed for an amount of timeequal to Pa F25 in order to remove water from the batteries as quickly as possible.If there are no pressure probes on the machine, this will be applied to temperature.

8.2.3 Defrost endDefrost end may be determined by temperature/pressure values read by analogue probes ST3, ST2, ST6 (analogue inputs)or by digital input (digital inputs).

The configuration parameters are:• Pa d09 : Circuit 1 defrost end probe• Pa d10: Circuit 2 defrost end probe

Possible values and meanings of these parameters are shown below:

ValueParameters

Description

0 defrost end in response to digital input1 defrost end in response to ST32 defrost end in response to ST43 defrost end in response to ST6

If Pa d09=0 (defrost end in response to digital input) the digital input configured as “End of defrost circuit 1” (digitalinputs) will be taken into consideration; if Pa d10=0 input “circuit 2 defrost end”(digital inputs) .In this configuration, as soon as the input becomes active the circuit will have a defrost end.

If an analogue input is selected for defrost end, the defrost will end will pressure/temperature rises above the value ofparameter Pa d04 (defrost end temperature/pressure).

If the input is not configured, defrost will end only when pressure/temperature rises above the maximum duration set byparameter Pa d05

Defrost will always end if duration exceeds the maximum duration set by parameter Pa D05.

After defrost end, if drip time Pa d07= 0 the compressors will stay on; if not, the adjustment shown in the figure below willtake place:

diagram

Compressors

Reversing valve

Fans

Parameterconfiguration

Drip time

Page 30: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 30

diagram

Page 31: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 31

9 PARAMETERSx

Parameters make the ” Energy 400” a fully configurable device.They may be modified through:• instrument keyboard• Personal computer (with a suitable connection and “Param manager” software)

We will now take a detailed look at all the parameters, divided by category.

9.1 Description of Parameters

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS:Determine the features of the machine.

If one or more of the parameters in this category are modified, the cotnroller must be switched off after the modificationand switched on again to ensure correct operation.

Maximum set point during “heating”Upper limit on set point in “heating” modeMinimum set point during “heating”Lower limit on set point in “heating” modeMaximum set point during “cooling”Upper limit on set point in “cooling” modeMinimum set point during “cooling”Lower limit on set point in “cooling” modeNumber of circuits on machine (∗∗ )Number of cooling circuits0= not permitted1= 1 cooling circuit2= 2 cooling circuitsNumber of compressors per circuit (∗∗ )0= no compressors1= 1 compressor2= 2 compressors3= 3 compressors4= 4 compressorsNumber of capacity steps per compressor (∗∗ )0= no capacity steps1= 1 capacity step per compressor2= 2 capacity steps per compressor3= 3 capacity steps per compressorCompressor on sequence0= depending on hours of operation1= unvaried on sequence Compressor selection algorithm0= circuit saturation1= circuit balancing ST1 configurationUsed to configure analogue input ST10= No probe1= Inflowing air/water analogue input2= Heating request digital input3= Regulation algorithm request digital input4= NTC differential input ST2 configuration0= No probe1= Circuit 1 outflowing water/antifreeze/inlet air analogue input2= Cooling request digital input ST3 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= 4…20 mA condensation input3= 4…20 mA dynamic set point input4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 15= Regulation algorithm input in “heating” mode for water-water machines with manual reversal ST4 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= Multifunctional digital input3= Outdoor temperature analogue input ST5 configuration0= No probe1= Outflowing water/anti-freeze/inlet air analogue input, circuit 2 ST6 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= 4…20 mA condensation input

∗ non sono ammesse configurazioni macchina con numero di gradini superiore a 4

Pa H01

Pa H02

Pa H03

Pa H04

Pa H05

Pa H06

Pa H07

Pa H08

Pa H09

Pa H11

Pa H12

Pa H13

Pa H14

Pa H15

Pa H16

Page 32: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 32

3= Not permitted4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 2 Bottom of scale pressure valuePressure value corresponding to an analogue input value (ST3 or ST6) on the 20mA input (if configured as a current input).Example if using a pressure transducer with limits of 0-30.0 bar/4-20mA, set PaH17=300 Polarity of digital inputs ID1,ID2,ID3,ID4 Polarity of digital inputs ID5,ID6,ID7,ID8 Polarity of digital inputs ID9,ID10,ID11,ST4 Polarity of digital inputs ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15These parameters may be used to select the polarity which will activate the digital inputs to suit them to various operatingrequirements. Refer to Digital inputs: polarity when setting input polarity. Configuration of digital input ID1 Configuration of digital input ID2 Configuration of digital input ID3 Configuration of digital input ID4 Configuration of digital input ID5 Configuration of digital input ID6 Configuration of digital input ID7 Configuration of digital input ID8 Configuration of digital input ID9 Configuration of digital input ID10 Configuration of digital input ID11 Configuration of digital input ST4 if configured as digital

0 Input disabled 12 Low pressure circuit 11 Flow switch 13 Low pressure circuit 22 Remote OFF 14 High pressure compressor 13 Remote Heat/Cool 15 High pressure compressor 24 Thermal switch compressor 1 16 High pressure compressor 35 Thermal switch compressor 2 17 High pressure compressor 46 Thermal switch compressor 3 18 Defrost end circuit 17 Thermal switch compressor 4 19 Defrost end circuit 28 Thermal switch fan circuit 1 20 Request for power step 29 Thermal switch fan circuit 2 21 Request for power step 310 High pressure circuit 1 22 Request for power step 411 High pressure circuit 2

Configuration of output RL2 Configuration of output RL3 Configuration of output RL4 Configuration of output RL5 Configuration of output RL6 Configuration of output RL7These parameters are used to assign various functions to relays as required by the type of application.0= Not in use1= Reversing valve circuit 12= Reversing valve circuit 23= Condensation fan circuit 14= Condensation fan circuit 25= Electrical heater 16= Electrical heater 27= Hydraulic pump8= Evaporator fan9= Power Step 210= Power Step 311= Power Step 4 Polarity of output RL2 Polarity of output RL3 Polarity of output RL4 Polarity of output RL5 Polarity of output RL8Relay polarity may be set for the corresponding outputs.0=relay on if output active1=relay off if output not active Configuration of analogue output 1 (AN1 or TK1) Configuration of analogue output 2 (AN2 or TK2)Condensation fan control outputs are available with 2 types of signal.0= Suignal for phase cut fan control1= 4-20mA output Not in use Selection of operating mode0= Selection from keyboard1= Selection from digital input Enable dynamic set pointIf enabled, this function permits automatic variation of the working set point depending on outdoor temperature or on a4-20mA analogue input. The parameter has no meaning if PaH13≠3 or PaH14≠3.0= Function disabled1= Function enabled Maximum dynamic set point offset in cooling mode

Pa H17

Pa H18Pa H19Pa H20Pa H21

Pa H23Pa H24Pa H25Pa H26Pa H27Pa H28Pa H29Pa H30Pa H31Pa H32Pa H33Pa H34

Pa H35Pa H36Pa H37Pa H38Pa H39Pa H40

Pa H41Pa H42Pa H43Pa H44Pa H45

Pa H46Pa H47

Pa H48Pa H49

Pa H50

Pa H51

Page 33: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 33

The maximum value that may be added to the set point in cooling mode (COO) when the DYNAMIC SET POINT function isenabled. Maximum dynamic set point offset in heating modeThe maximum value that may be added to the set point in heating mode (HEA) when the DYNAMIC SET POINT function isenabled. Outdoor temperature set point in cooling modeThe outdoor temperature value on the basis of which …The parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature set point in heating modeThe parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature differential in cooling modeThe parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature differential in heating modeThe parameter is significant only if the set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Offset ST1, Offset ST2, Offset ST3These parameters may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature or pressure reading andthe actual temperature or pressure. Offset ST4 Offset ST5These parameters may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature reading and the actualtemperature. Offset ST6This parameter may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature (or pressure) reading andthe actual temperture or pressure. Mains frequencyMains frequency 50 HzMains frequency 60 Hz Selection °C or °F0= degrees °C1= degrees °F Family serial address, Device serial addressThese parameters may be used to address the device when connected to a personal computer or supervision system.Normally both are 0. User passwordMay be used to enter a password for access to level two parameters, and to copy parameters from the instrument to thecopy card. Copy card write passwordThe password that must be entered to copy parameters to the copy card. Presence of keyboard

ALARM PARAMETERS:

Low pressure pressure switch by-pass time.Determines the delay between starting up the compressor and starting up the low pressure digital alarm diagnostics.Expressed in seconds. Low pressure alarm events per hourUsed to set the number of low pressure digital alarm events per hour beyond which the system will switch from automaticreset to manual reset. Bypass pump activation flow switchDetermines the delay between activation of the hydraulic pump and activation of the flow switch alarm diagnostics.Expressed in seconds. Duration of active flow switch inputMay be used to set the amount of time for which the flow switch digital input must remain active to generate a flowswitch alarm. The timer starts after the flow switch by-pass time. Expressed in seconds. Duration of inactive flow switch inputMay be used to set the time for which the flow switch digital input must remain inactive to be included in thecorresponding alarm. Expressed in seconds. Number of flow switch alarms/hourMay be used to set the number of flow switch digital alarms per hour after which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset . When this occurs, the hydraulic pump is deactivated. By-pass compressor thermal switch following compressor onDetermines the delay between compressor activation and activation of the compressor thermal switch digital diagnosticsalarm. Expressed in seconds.Compressor thermal switch alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of compressor thermal switch alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm is switchedfrom automatic to manual reset.Number of fan thermal switch events per hourMay be used to set a number of fan thermal events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset .Anti-freeze alarm by-passDetermines the delay between turning on the machine (selection of an operating mode or switch from OFF->ON) andactivation of the compressor thermal switch digital alarm diagnostics. Expressed in seconds.Anti-freeze alarm set point

Pa H52

Pa H53

Pa H54

Pa H55

Pa H56

Pa H57Pa H58Pa H59

Pa H60Pa H61

Pa H62

Pa H63

Pa H64

Pa H65Pa H66

Pa H67

Pa H68

Pa H68

Pa A01

Pa A02

Pa A03

Pa A04

Pa A05

Pa A06

Pa A07

Pa A08

Pa A09

Pa A10

Pa A11

Page 34: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 34

May be used to set the temperature below which the anti-freeze alarm is triggered.Anti-freeze alarm hysteresisMay be used to set the differential value of the anti-freeze alarm.Anti-freeze alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of anti-freeze alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset .Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation set pointMay be used to set a condensation pressure/temperature value beyond which the high pressure alarm will be triggered.Analogue input high pressure/temperature hysteresisMay be used to set the differential for the analogue high pressure alarm.Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation bypassDetermines the delay after turning on of the first compressor in the cooling circuit and activation of the correspondinganalogue input low pressure/temperature analogue alarm diagnostics.Analogue input low pressure/temperature activation set pointMay be used to set a temperature/pressure value below which the low pressure alarm will be triggered.Analogue input low pressure/temperature hysteresisMay be used to set the differential for the analogue low pressure/temperature alarm.Number of analogue input low pressure alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of low pressure analogue alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm will be switchedfrom automatic to manual reset.Machine out of coolant differentialIf the difference between the absolute value of the set point and of the control probe exceeds this parameter, the machineout of coolant timer will start.Bypass machine out of coolantDetermines the delay between the turning on of the first compressor in the corresponding cooling circuit and activation ofthe machine out of coolant alarm diagnostics. Expressed in minutes.Duration of machine out of coolantDetermines the duration of the condition described under parameter A20 beyond which the machine out of coolant alarmwill be triggered.Machine out of coolant alarm triggeredEnables machine out of coolant alarm diagnostics0= diagnostics disabled1= diagnostics enabled Enable low pressure alarm during defrostingEnables the minimum alarm during defrosting.0= Low pressure alarm diagnostics disabled during defrosting1= Low pressure alarm diagnostics enabled during defrosting Input over-temperature set pointTemperature value ST1 above which the high temperature alarm E46 is triggered. Input over-temperature durationDetermines the duration of the condition described for parameter A25 beyond which the input over-temperature alarm istriggered.

COMPRESSOR PARAMETERS

OFF-ON safety timeThe minimum amount of time that must pass between turning off the compressor and turning it on again. Expressed intens of seconds.ON-ON safety timeThe minimum amount of time that must pass between turning the compressor on and turning it on again. Expressed intens of seconds.Hysteresis regulation algorithm during coolingMay be used to select intervention differential in cooling mode.Hysteresis regulation algorithm during heatingMay be used to select intervention differential in heating mode. Regulation algorithm step intervention differentialMay be used to set a temperature differential in relation to the set point beyond which the second step is activated. Compressor on intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning on of two compressors. Compressor off intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning off of two compressors. Capacity step on intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning on of compressor and of capacity steps.

FAN CONTROL PARAMETERS:

Fan output configuration0 = proportional fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on parameters)1 = fan output “on-off”; in this mode the regulation algorithm performs the same calculation as in proportional fanoutput, but if the result is greater than 0, regulation algorithmoutput will be 100.2 = on-off operation in response to request from compressor. In this mode output is 0 if no compressor in the circuit ison, or 100% if at least one compressor in the circuit is on.Fan pick-up timeTime for which fan runs at maximum speed after starting up. Expressed in seconds/10.Fan phase shiftThis parameter may be used to calibrate fan control output in proportion to the type of fan in use, adjusting it to suit thefan’s typical current/voltage phase shift.Impulse duration of triac onMay be used to vary the length of the impulse from the triac command.Functioning in resposne to compressor request

Pa A12

Pa A13

Pa A14

Pa A15

Pa A16

Pa A17

Pa A18

Pa A19

Pa A20

Pa A21

Pa A22

Pa A23

Pa A24

Pa A25

Pa A26

Pa C01

Pa C02

Pa C03

Pa C04

Pa C05

Pa C06

Pa C07

Pa C08

Pa F01

Pa F02

Pa F03

Pa F04

Pa F05

Page 35: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 35

0= if compressor is off, fan is off1= condensation control independent of compressorMinimum speed during coolingMinimum value of proportional fan control during cooling. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Maximum silent speed during coolingMaximum value of proportional fan control during cooling. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during coolingCondensation pressure/temperature value below which the fan runs at minimum cooling speed.Proportional band during coolingTemperature/pressure differential corresponding to change from minimum to silent maximum fan speed during cooling(F07).Fan cut-off differentialCondensation temperature/pressure differential in relation to temperature/pressure set point (F08 or F14) beyond whichfan is cut off.Cut-off hysteresis.Condensation temperature/pressure differential for cut-off.Cut-off bypass timeDetermines the amount of time after fan start-up during which fan cut-off is excluded. Expressed in seconds.Maximum speed during coolingMay be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value in cooling mode.Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure during coolingCondensation pressure/temperature value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F13.Minimum speed during heatingMinimum proportional fan control value in heating mode. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Maximum silent speed during heatingMaximum value of proportional fan control during heating. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during heatingCondensation temperature/pressure value above which the fan operates at minimum heating speed.Proportional band during heatingTemperature/pressure differential corresponding to a change from minimum to maximum silent fan speed during heating(F16).Maximum speed during heatingMay be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value during heating.Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during heatingCondensation temperature/pressure value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F19.Preventilation in cooling modeMay be used to set a preventilation time in cooling mode before compressor combines on in order to prevent.…Combined or separate fan controlParameter F22 may be used to configure dual circuit machines with a single condenser.Parameter F22 condensation type0= separate condensers1= combined condenser.If Pa F22 = 0 the fans are independent and depend on condensation pressure/temperature and the status of thecompressors in the circuits. If Pa F22= 1 the outputs of the 2 fans are parallel and they are controlled:on the basis of the greater of the two circuit condensation probes in cooling modeon the basis of the smaller of the two circuit condensation probes in heating modeIf there is no condensation probe in one of the 2 circuits, a configuration alarm will be generated. Fan activation temperature/pressure set point during defrostingDuring defrosting, if temperature/pressure exceeds the “fan activation during defrosting” threshold (Pa F23) the fans willcome on at full power.Fan activation hysteresis during defrostingCondensation temperature/pressure differential for fan control during defrosting.

PUMP PARAMETERS

Pump operating modeMay be used to determine pump operating mode:0=continuous operation1=operation in response to a request from the regulation algorithmDelay between pump ON and compressor ONMay be used to set a delay between starting a pump and starting a compressor, expressed in seconds.Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFFMay be used to set a delay between turning off a compressor and turning off a pump, expressed in seconds.

ANTI-FREEZE/BOILER PARAMETERS

Configuration of electrical heaters in defrost modeDetermines electrical heater operation during defrosting0=come on only in response to a request from the regulation algorithm1=always on during defrostingConfiguration of electrical heaters on in cooling modeDetermines electrical heater operation in cooling mode0=off during cooling1=on during cooling (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)Configuration of electrical heaters on in heating modeDetermines electrical heater operation in heating mode

Pa F06

Pa F07

Pa F08

Pa F09

Pa F10

Pa F11

Pa F12

Pa F13

Pa F14

Pa F15

Pa F16

Pa F17

Pa F18

Pa F19

Pa F20

Pa F21

Pa F22

Pa F23

Pa F24

Pa P01

Pa P02

Pa P03

Pa r01

Pa r02

Pa r03

Page 36: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 36

0=off during heating1= on during cooling (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probeConfiguration of electrical heater 2 control probeDetermines the control probes belonging to electrical heaters in heating mode0= Not present1=Control probe ST12=Control probe ST23= Control probe ST5Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on stand-byDetermines the status of electrical heaters when the instrument is OFF or on stand-by0=Always off when OFF or on stand-by1=On when OFF or on stand-by (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm)Set point of anti-freeze electrial heater 1 in heating modeTemperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in heating mode.Set point of anti-freeze electrical heater 1 in cooling modeTemperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in cooling mode.Maximum set point of anti-freeze electrical heatersDetermines the maximum setting of the anti-freeze electrical heater set points.Minimum set point of anti-freeze electrical heatersDetermines the minimumsetting of the anti-freeze electrcial heater set points.Anti-freeze heater hysteresisAnti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm hysteresis.Set point of external anti-freeze electrical heatersTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters in the secondary circuit come on.Set point of electrical heater 2 in heating modeTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in heating mode.Set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling modeTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in cooling mode.Enable supplementary electrical heaters

DEFROST PARAMETERS::

Defrost enabled0= defrost function enabled1= defrost function disabledDefrost start temperature / pressureTemperature/pressure below which the defrost cycle is started.Defrost interval (response time)Duration for which probe remains below defrost start temperature/pressure, expressed in minutes.Defrost end temperature/pressureTemperature/pressure above which defrost ends.Maximum defrost time (time-out)Maximum duration of defrost in minutes.Compressor-reversing valve wait time (anti-bleeding)Wait time between compressor going off and reversal of the 4-way valve at the beginning of the defrost cycle.Drip timeWait time at the end of the defrost cycle between the compressor going off and the reversal of the 4-way valve. Temperature at which defrost starts if Pa H49= 1Temperature below which the defrost cycle is started. Temperature at which defrost ends if Pa H49=1Temperature above which the defrost cycle is ended.

9.2 Parameters table

All ”Energy 400” parameters are listed in the table below.

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS *Par. Description Value Limits Unit of meas.

Pa H01 Maximum set point during heating H02 ÷ 90.0 °CPa H02 Minimum set point during heating -40.0 ÷ H01 °CPa H03 Maximum set point during cooling H04 ÷ 90.0 °CPa H04 Minimum set point during cooling -40.0 ÷ H03 °CPa H05 Number of circuits on machine 0 ÷ 2 NumPa H06 Number of compressors per circuit 0 ÷ 4 NumPa H07 Number of capacity steps per compressor 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H08 Compressors on sequence 0÷1 FlagPa H09 Circuit balancing 0÷1 FlagPa H10 Presence of heat pump 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H11 Configuration ST1 0 ÷ 4 NumPa H12 Configuration ST2 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H13 Configuration ST3 0 ÷ 5 NumPa H14 Configuration ST4 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H15 Configuration ST5 0 ÷ 5 NumPa H16 Configuration ST6 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H17 Bottom of scale pressure value 0-350 KPa*10Pa H18 Polarity ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H19 Polarity ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8 0 ÷ 1 Flag

Pa r04Pa r05

Pa r06

Pa r07

Pa r08

Pa r09

Pa r10

Pa r11

Pa r12

Pa r13

Pa r14

Pa r15

Pa d01

Pa d02

Pa d03

Pa d04

Pa d05

Pa d06

Pa d07

Pa d08

Pa d09

Configurationparameters

Page 37: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 37

Pa H20 Polarity ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H21 Polarity ST1 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H22 Polarity ST2 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H23 Configuration ID1 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H24 Configuration ID2 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H25 Configuration ID3 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H26 Configuration ID4 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H27 Configuration ID5 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H28 Configuration ID6 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H29 Configuration ID7 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H30 Configuration ID8 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H31 Configuration ID9 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H32 Configuration ID10 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H33 Configuration ID11 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H34 Configuration ST4 if digital input 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H35 Configuration relay 2 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H36 Configuration relay 3 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H37 Configuration relay 4 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H38 Configuration relay 5 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H39 Configuration relay 6 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H40 Configuration relay 7 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H41 Polarity RL2 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H42 Polarity RL3 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H43 Polarity RL4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H44 Polarity RL5 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H45 Alarm relay polarity 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H46 Configuration fan 1 output 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H47 Configuration fan 2 output 0 ÷ 2 NumPa H48 Free 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H49 Selection of operating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H50 Enable dynamic set point 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H51 Offset of dynamic set point during cooling -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H52 Offset of dynamic set point during heating -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H53 Dynamic outdoor temp. set point during cooling 0 ÷ 255 °CPa H54 Dynamic outdoor temp. set point during heating 0 ÷ 255 °CPa H55 Delta dynamic outdoor temp. set point during cooling -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H56 Delta dynamic outdoor temp. set point during heating -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H57 Offset ST1 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H58 Offset ST2 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H59 Offset ST3 -127 ÷ 127 °C/10-Kpa*10Pa H60 Offset ST4 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H61 Offset ST5 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H62 Offset ST6 -127 ÷ 127 °C/10-Kpa*10Pa H63 0=50 Hz 1=60 Hz 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H64 0= °C 1=°F FlagPa H65 Family serial address 0 ÷ 14 Num.Pa H66 Device serial address 0 ÷ 14 Num.Pa H67 User password 0 ÷ 255 Num.Pa H68 Copy card password 0 ÷ 255 Num.

* If parameters in this category are modified, the controller must be turned off and on again to ensure correctfunctioning.

ALARM PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa A01 Low pressure switch bypass time after compressor on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A02 Low pressure alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A03 Flow switch bypass time after pump on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A04 Duration of active flow switch input 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A05 Duration of inactive flow switch input 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A06 Number of flow switch alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A07 Bypass compressor thermal switch from compressor on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A08 Number of compressors 1 + 2 thermal switch alarms/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A09 Number of fan thermal switch alarm events/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A10 Anti-freeze alarm bypass after ON-OFF 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A11 Anti-freeze alarm activation set point -127 ÷ 127 °CPa A12 Hysteresis of anti-freeze alarm 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa A13 Anti-freeze alarm events/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A14 Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation set

point0 ÷ 900 °C/10 – Kpa*10

Pa A15 Analogue input high pressure hysteresis 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A16 Analogue input low pressure activation bypass 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A17 Analogue input low pressure activation set point -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A18 Analogue input low pressure hysteresis 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A19 Analogue input low pressure alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 Num

Alarm parameters

Page 38: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 38

Pa A20 Machine out of coolant differential 0 ÷ 255 °CPa A21 Machine out of coolant bypass 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A22 Machine out of coolant duration 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A23 Machine out of coolant alarm triggered 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa A24 Enable low pressure alarm during defrost 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa A25 Input over-temperature set point 0 ÷ 255 °CPa A26 Input over-temperature duration 0 ÷ 255 S*10

COMPRESSOR PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa C01 ON-OFF safety time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa C02 ON-ON safety time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa C03 Hysteresis regulation algorithm during cooling 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa C04 Hysteresis regulation algorithm during heating 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa C05 Regulation algorithm step intervention deltaPa C06 Compressor – compressor on interval 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa C07 Compressor – compressor off interval 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa C08 Capacity step on interval 0 ÷ 255 Seconds

FAN CONTROL PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa F01 Fan output mode 0 ÷ 2 Num.Pa F02 Fan pick-up time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds/10Pa F03 Fan phase shift 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F04 Impulse duration of triak on 0 ÷ 255 uS*100Pa F05 Functioning in response to compressor request 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa F06 Minimum speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F07 Maximum silent speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F08 Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during

cooling-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F09 Prop. band during cooling 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F10 Delta cut-off 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F11 Cut-off hysteresis. 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F12 Bypass time cut-off 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa F13 Max speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F14 Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during

cooling-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F15 Minimum speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F16 Maximum silent speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F17 Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during

heating-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F18 Prop. band during heating 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F19 Maximum fan speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F20 Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during

heating-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F21 Preventilation in cooling mode 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa F22 Combined or separate fan control 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa F23 Fan activation temperature/pressure set point during

defrosting-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F24 Fan activation hysteresis during defrosting 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F25 Preventilation after defrosting 0 ÷ 255 Seconds

PUMP PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa P01 Pump operating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa P02 Delay between pump ON and compressor ON 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa P03 Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFF 0 ÷ 255 Seconds

ELECTRICAL HEATER PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa r01 Configuration of electrical heaters in defrost mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa R02 Configuration of electrical heaters on in cooling mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r03 Configuration of electrical heaters on in heating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r04 Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probe 0 ÷ 6 NumPa r05 Configuration of electrical heater 2 control probe 0 ÷ 6 NumPa r06 Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on STAND-BY 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r07 Set point of electrical heater 1 in heating mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r08 Set point of electrical heater 1 in cooling mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r09 Max. set point electrical heaters P r10 ÷ 127 °CPa r10 Min. set point electrical heaters -127 ÷ P r09 °CPa r11 hysteresis of anti-freeze heaters 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa R12 Set point of external anti-freeze electrical heaters Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r13 Set point of electrical heater 2 in heating mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r14 Set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °C

Compressorparameters

Fan controlparameters

Pump parameters

Electrical heaterparameters

Page 39: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 39

Pa r15 Enable supplementary electrical heaters 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r16 Delta of activation of supplementary heater 1 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa r17 Delta of activation of supplementary heater 2 0 ÷ 25.5 °C

DEFROST PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa d01 Defrost enabled 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa d02 Defrost start temperature/pressure -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa d03 Defrost interval 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa d04 Defrost end temperature/pressure -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa d05 Maximum defrost time 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa d06 Compressor-reversing valve wait time 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa d07 Drip time 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa d08 Delay between defrosting of circuits 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa d09 Output probe defrost circuit 1 0 ÷ 8 NumPa d10 Output probe defrost circuit 2 0 ÷ 8 NumPa d11 Delay in compressors on in defrost mode 0 ÷ 255 Seconds

EXTENSION PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa N01 Polarity of ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa N02 Configuration ID12 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N03 Configuration ID13 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N04 Configuration ID14 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N05 Configuration ID15 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N06 Configuration relay 9 0 ÷ 11 NumPa N07 Configuration relay 10 0 ÷ 11 Num

Defrostparameters

Extensionparameters

Page 40: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 40

10 DIAGNOSTICSx

“Energy 400” can perform full systems diagnostics and signal a series of alarms.Alarm trigger and reset modes are set using parameters Pa A01 – Pa A26.For some alarms the signal will not be given for a certain amount of time, determined by a parameter.For some alarms the number of alarm events is counted; if the number of alarm events in the past hour exceeds a certainthreshold set by a parameter, the alarm will switch from automatic to manual reset.Alarms are sampled every 113 seconds;Example: if the number of events/hour is set to 3, the duration of an alarm must fall between 2*113 seconds and 3*113seconds for the alarm to be switched from automatic to manual reset.

If an alarm is triggered more than once within one sampling period (113 seconds), only one alarm will be counted.

Alarms with manual reset are reset by pressing the ON-OFF button and releasing

Manual reset shuts down corresponding loads and requires an operator to intervene (reset the alarm using the ON-OFFcontrol).Manual reset alarms are used mainly to identify problems which could result in damage to the system

10.1 List of alarms

When an alarm is triggered, two things occur:• The corresponding loads are shut down• The alarm appears on the keyboard display

The alarm message consists of a code with the format “Enn” (where nn is a 2-digit number identifying the type of alarm,such as: E00, E25, E39….).All possible alarms are listed in the table below, along with their codes and the corresponding loads that will be shutdown:

Alarms

Alarm events perhour

Time225 s 225 s 225 s 225 s

1 2 3Counter

Alarm

Automatic reset Manual reset

Alarm sampling

Page 41: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 41

LOADS SHUT DOWNCODE MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONCOMP.1 COMP.2 COMP.3 COMP.4 FAN1 FAN2 PUMP RES.1 RES.2

E00 Remote off • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Remote OFF”

(refer to digital inputs)

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E01 High pressure circuit 1 • Compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

circuit 1” (refer to digital inputs)

YES YES1 YES1 YES1

E02 Low pressure circuit 1 • Compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down; also condenserfans if condensation is separate for the 2 circuits (refer tocombined or separate condensation);

• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressurecircuit 1” (refer to digital inputs);

• Automatically reset unless alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A02, after which manually reset;

• Inactive during timer Pa A01 after compressor on or reversalof 4-way valve (reversing valve) in circuit 1

YES YES1 YES1 YES1 YES YES2

E03 Thermal switchprotection compressor 1

• Compressor 1 will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch

compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the

value of parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.

YES

E04 Thermal switchprotection condenserfan circuit 1

• Fans and compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down; if the 2circuits are set up for combined condensation, (refer tocombined or separate condensation) compressors in circuit 2will also be shut down;

• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switchfan circuit 1” (refer to digital inputs);

• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A09, after which manually reset;

YES YES1 YES1 —

YES2YES1 —

YES2YES YES2

E05 Anti-freeze circuit 1 • Fans and compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST2 (refer to analogue inputs) is

configured as anti-freeze probe (Pa H12 = 1);• Triggered when probe ST2 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Turned off if probe ST2 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +

Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the

value of parameter Pa A13,after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on

with the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or from the digitalinput ON-OFF (refer to digital inputs) or when heating modeis started.

YES YES1 YES1 YES1 YES YES2

E06 Probe ST2 fault • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered if probe ST2, configured as an analogue input,

shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E07 Probe ST3 fault • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered if probe ST3, configured as an analogue input,

shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

Tabella Allarmi

Page 42: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 42

E08 External circuit 1 anti-freeze

• Fans and compressors will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST3 (refer to analogue inputs) is

configured as an external anti-freeze probe (Pa H13 = 4);• Active when probe ST3 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Goes off if probe ST3 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +

Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value

of parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on

using the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or ON-OFF digitalinput (refer to digital inputs) or heating mode is switched on.

YES YES YES YES YES YES

E09 High pressurecompressor 1

Compressor 1 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset

YES

E13 Thermal switchprotection compressor 2

Compressor 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch

compressor 2” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value of

parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor is turned on.

YES

E19 High pressurecompressor 2

Compressor 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset

YES

E21 High pressure circuit 2 Compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

circuit 2” (refer to digital inputs)

YES YES

E22 Low pressure circuit 2 Compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down, as well as condenserfans if the 2 circuits have separate condensation (refer tocombined or separate condensation);

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressurecircuit 2” (refer to digital inputs);

Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A02, after which manually reset;

Inactive during timer Pa A01 after compressor on or reversal of4-way valve (reversing valve) of circuit 1

YES YES YES YES2

E23 Thermal switchprotection compressor 3

Compressor 3 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch

compressor 3” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach value of

parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.

YES

E24 Thermal switchprotection condenserfan circuit 2

Fans and compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down; if the 2 circuitshave combined condensation (refer to combined or separatecondensation) the compressors in circuit 1 will also be shutdown;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch circuit2 fan” (refer to digital inputs);

Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches value ofparameter Pa A09, after which manually reset;

YES2 YES2 YES YES YES2 YES

Anti-freeze circuit 2 Fans and compressors will be shut down; YES YES YES2 YES

Page 43: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 43

Active if analogue probe ST5 (refer to analogue inputs) isconfigured as anti-freeze probe (Pa H15 = 1);

Triggered when probe ST5 detects a value below Pa A11;Turns off when probe ST5 detects a value above Pa A11 + Pa

A12;Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches value of

parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A10 after turning on Energy 400 using

On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or digital input ON-OFF(refer to digital inputs) or start of heating mode.

E26 Probe ST5 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST5, configured as an analogue input, shorts

or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E27 Probe ST6 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST6, configured as an analogue input, shorts

or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E08 External circuit 2 anti-freeze

• Fans and compressors will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST6 (refer to analogue inputs) is

configured as an external anti-freeze probe (Pa H13 = 4);• Active when probe ST6 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Goes off if probe ST6 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +

Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value

of parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on

using the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or ON-OFF digitalinput (refer to digital inputs) or heating mode is switched on.

YES YES YES YES YES YES

E29 High pressurecompressor 3

Compressor 3 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

compressor 3” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset

YES

E33 Thermal switchprotection compressor 4

Compressor 4 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch

compressor 4” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the value of

parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.

YES

E39 High pressurecompressor 4

Compressor 4 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

compressor 4” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset

YES

E40 Probe ST1 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST1, configured as an analogue input, shorts

or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E41 Flow switch All compressors, fans and pump will be cut off if manuallyreset;

Triggered if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (referto digital inputs) remains active for an amount of timeequal to Pa A04;

Goes off if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (referto digital inputs) remains inactive for an amount of timeequal to Pa A05;

YES YES YES YES YES YES SI3

Page 44: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 44

Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A06 , after which manually reset;

Inactive during timer Pa A03 following pump on.E42 Probe ST4 fault All loads will be shut down;

Triggered if probe ST4, configured as an analogue input,shorts, is cut off, or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E45 Configuration error All loads will be shut down;Triggered if at least one of the following conditions apply:H11= 2 (ST1 configured as request for heating), H12= 2 (ST2

configured as request for cooling) and both inputs areactive.

Sum of compressors and capacity steps on machine exceeds 4The keyboard is declared present (Pa H69=1) and there is no

communication between the keyboard and the basic unit.

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E46 All loads will be shut down except the pump;Triggered if probe ST1 (refer to analogue inputs) has a value

exceeding Pa A25 for an amount of time exceeding Pa 26in cooling mode;

Goes off if probe ST1 (refer to analogue inputs) has a valuelower than Pa A25 – Pa A12;

Automatically reset.

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

1 If it belongs to circuit 12 If combined condensation system3 Only if manual reset e

outputs defined as capacity steps will go off if there is an alarm for the compressor to which they belong

Page 45: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 45

The tables below list alarms by type (digital or analogue).

TABLE OF DIGITAL ALARMS:

Alarm name Bypass trigger event Bypass time Triggerduration

Deactivationduration

N. alarmevents/hour

Compressor 1,2,3,4 highpressure alarm

None absent absent absent Manual reset

High pressure circuitalarm

None absent absent absent Manual reset

Low pressure alarm A compressor comingon in the circuit orreversal of 4-wayvalve

Pa A01 absent absent Pa A02

Flow switch alarm Pump coming on Pa A03 Pa A04 Pa A05 Pa A06Compressor 1,2,3,4thermal switch alarm

Compressor comingon

Pa A07 absent absent Pa A08

Fan 1,2 thermal switchalarm

None absent absent absent Pa A09

TABLE OF ANALOGUE ALARMS:

Alarm name Event Bypasstime

Triggerset point

Hysteresis N. alarmevents/hour

Regulation probe

Anti-freezealarm circuit1

On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off

Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive

Pa A13 ST2 if configuration parameter PaH12 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive

Anti-freezealarm circuit2

On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off

Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive

Pa A13 ST5 if configuration parameter PaH15 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive

Externalanti-freezealarmcircuit 1

On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off

Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive

Pa A13 ST3 if configuration parameter PaH13 = 4, otherwise alarm isinactive

Externalanti-freezealarm circuit2

On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off

Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive

Pa A13 ST6 if configuration parameter PaH16 = 4, otherwise alarm isinactive

Low pressure/lowtemperaturecondensationalarm circuit1

Compressorturned on orreversal of 4-way valve

Par A16 Pa A17 Pa A18positive

Pa A19 ST3 se Pa H13=1 or 2 or else ST4if Pa H14 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive

Low pressure/lowtemperaturecondensationalarm circuit2

Compressorturned on orreversal of 4-3way valve

Par A16 Pa A17 Pa A18positive

Pa A19 ST6 if Pa H16=1, otherwise alarmis inactive

Highpressure/hightemperaturecondensationalarm circuit1

None absent Pa A14 Pa A15negative

Manual reset ST3 if Pa H13=1 or 2, or ST4 if PaH14 = 1; otherwise alarm isinactive

Highpressure/hightemperaturecondensationalarm circuit2

None absent Pa A14 Pa A15negative

Manual reset ST6 if Pa H16=1 or 2, otherwisealarm is inactive

Hightemperatureregulationalgorithmalarm*

None absent Pa A25 Pa A12negative

Automaticreset

ST1

Digital alarms

Analogue alarms

Page 46: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 46

11 TECHNICAL FEATURESx

11.1 Technical data

Typical Min. Max.Power supply voltage 12V~ 10V~ 14V~Power supply frequency 50Hz/60Hz — —Power 5VA — —Insulation class 1 — —Protection grade Front panel

IP0— —

Operating temperature 25°C 0°C 60°COperating humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%

Storage temperature 25°C -20°C 85°CStorage humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%

11.2 Electromechanical features

110/230 V digital outputs n° 8 5 A resistive relays; ¼ hp 230VAC; 1/8 hp 125VACAnalogue outputs n° 2 triac piloting outputs or configurable 4-20 mA outputs

n° 1 4-20 mA outputAnalogue inputs n° 4 NTC R25 10KΩ

N° 2 configurable input or 4-20mA o r NTC R25 10KΩDigital inputs n° 11 voltage-free digital inputs 10m ATerminals and connectors n° 1 10-way high voltage connectors, step 7.5

n° 2 16-way rapid clamp connectors for low voltage, step 4.2, AWG 16-28n° 1 p2.5 5–way connector for remote control and programming withexternal copy card, AWG 24-30n° 1 20-way connector for connection of extensionn° 1 3-way screw terminal for remote keyboard

Serial ports n° 1 9600 serial portn° 1 2400 serial port

The instrument must be powered with a suitable current transformer with the following features:

• Primary voltage: 230V~-15%÷+6%; 110V~±10%• Secondary voltage: 12V~• Power supply frequency: 50Hz; 60Hz• Power: 5VA;

11.3 Regulations

The product complies with the following European Community Directives:• Council Directive 73/23/CEE and subsequent modifications• Council directive 89/336/CEE and subsequent modifications

and complies with the following harmonised regulations:• LOW VOLTAGE: EN60730• EMISSION: EN50081-1 (EN55022)• IMMUNITY: EN50082-1 (IEC 801-2,3,4)

currenttransformer

Page 47: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 47

12 USE OF THE DEVICEx

12.1 Permitted use

This product is used to control single and dual circuit chillers and heat pumps.

To ensure safety, the controller must be installed and operated in accordance with the instructions supplied, and access tohigh voltage components must be prevented under regular operating conditions. The device shall be properly protectedagainst water and dust and shall be accessible by using a tool only. The device is suitable for incorporation in a householdappliance and/or similar air conditioning device.According to the reference regulations, it is classified:• In terms of construction, as an automatic electronic control device to be incorporated with independent assembly or

integrated;• In terms of automatic operating features, as a type 1 action control device, with reference to manufacturing

tolerances and drifts;• As a class 2 device in relation to protection against electrical shock;• As a class A device in relation to software structure and class.

12.2 Forbidden use

Any use other than the permitted use is forbidden.Please note that relay contacts supplied are functional and are subject to fault (in that they are controlled by an electroniccomponent and be shorted or remain open); protection devices recommended by product standards or suggested bycommon sense in response to evident safety requirements shall be implemented outside of the instrument.

Page 48: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 48

13 RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKSx

Microtech shall not be held liable for any damage incurred as a result of:• installation/use other than those intended, and, in particular, failure to comply with the safety instructions specified

by applicable regulations and/or provided in this document;• use with equipment which does not provide adequate protection against electric shocks, water and dust under the

effective conditions of installation;• use with equipment which permits access to hazardous parts without the use of tools;• installation/use with equipment which does not comply with current regulations and legislation.

Page 49: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 49

14 GLOSSARYx

Multiple inputs with an OR relationship to one another are equivalent to a single input with the following status:• Active if at least one input is active• Inactive if no input is active

To “Scroll up” a menu means listing the various parameters from the bottom up (Pa10 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 08 ….)

Indicates that the instrument is waiting, in stand-by mode; all functions are suspended.

Set to zero.

Resetting an alarm means reactivating it ready for a new signal.

A manual reset alarm must be reset using the keyboard.

To “Scroll down” in a menu is to list parameters from the top down (Pa08 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 10 ….)

Means flashing; normally refers to leds

Average number of hours is the ratio between the total number of hours for which the compressors are available and thenumber of compressors in the circuit

Devices in the system, including compressors, fans, hydraulic pump, electrical anti-freeze heaters…

A reference value (set by the user) defining the system’s operating status, such as the thermostat that controlstemperature in the home: if we want to maintain a temperature of 20 °C we set the set point to 20°C (the heating systemwill come on if the temperature in the house falls below 20°C, and go off if it exceeds this value).

Values falling within a given interval; Range 1…100 indicates all values between 1 and 100

A hysteresis is normally defined around a set point to prevent frequent oscillation of the change of status of the load beingcontrolled;Example: suppose we have a set point of 20 °C on a probe for measurement of room temperature, above which acompressor will be started up;When room temperature nears the set point (20 °C) there will be an unstable phase during which the relay which starts upthe compressor will frequently switch from ON to OFF and vice versa, which could result in serious damage to the system.To prevent this problem a hysteresis is defined: an interval of tolerance within which there will be no change in status; inour example, we could set a hysteresis of 1 °C, in which case the compressor would be started up at 21 °C (set point +hysteresis) and turned off at 19 °C (set point – hysteresis)

Memory in which data is maintained even when the device is turned off (as distinct from temporary memory, the data inwhich is lost when the device is turned off.)

Temperature/pressure below or above which proportional output is cut off.

OR logico

Scroll up

Stand-by

Reset

Reset alarm

Manual reset

Scroll down

BLINK

Average numberof hours

Loads

Set Point

Range

Hysteresis

Permanentmemory

Cut-off

Page 50: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 50

15 ANALITIC INDEX

AAlarm events per hour ………………………………….40Alarm parameters ………………………………………..37Alarms …………………………………………………………..40Analogue alarms ………………………………………….45Analogue inputs …………………………………………….6

configuration table …………………………………7resolution and precision……………………………7

Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heatercontrol……………………………………………………….27diagram……………………………………………………..27

Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters…………………………………………………………………..19configuration ………………………………………….19probe configuration…………………………………19

Average number of hours…………………………….49BBLINK …………………………………………………………….49CCF (Control Fan) Modules ……………………………..5Combined or Separate Condensation…………26Components……………………………………………………5Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences

…………………………………………………………………..16Compressor configuration……………………………15

Simple compressors…………………………………15with 1 capacity step…………………………………15with 2 or 3 capacity steps………………………..15

Compressor control – regulation algorithm.23Cooling diagram ……………………………………..23Heating diagram……………………………………….24

Compressor parameters……………………………….38Compressor timing ……………………………………….17

Off-on and on-on diagram for 1compressor …………………………………………..17

Off-on timing ……………………………………………17on-on and off-off diagram 2 comp………..18On-on off-off times for 2 comp……………..17On-on timing…………………………………………….17

Compressor timing: ………………………………………18Compressors………………………………………………….15

coming on on the basis of hours ofoperation and circuit balancing …….16

coming on on the basis of hours ofoperation and circuit saturation ……16

unvaried on sequence with circuitbalancing …………………………………………….17

unvaried on sequence with circuitsaturation ……………………………………………17

Condensation fan …………………………………………18Condensation fan control…………………………….24

Cool mode ………………………………………………..24

Heat mode ………………………………………………. 25Condensation-Defrost probes …………………….. 19

probe configuration …………………………….. 20separate or combined condensation .. 20

Configuration of analogue inputs …………………6Configuration of digital inputs………………………8Configuration of fan outputs…………………………9Configuration of outputs ……………………………….9Configuration parameters ………………………….. 36Connection diagrams……………………………………..6Control during defrost ………………………………… 29

Compressors…………………………………………….. 29Fans ………………………………………………………….. 29Reversing valve ………………………………………… 29

Cooling ………………………………………………………… 21Copy Card …………………………………………………5; 14Cross references ………………………………………………4current transformer …………………………………….. 46Cut-off …………………………………………………………. 49DDefrost …………………………………………………………. 28

compressor management ………………………. 28Defrost end ………………………………………………….. 29

diagram ……………………………………………………. 30Parameter configuration………………………… 29

Defrost parameters……………………………………… 39Defrost start ………………………………………………… 28

diagram ……………………………………………………. 29Setting timer to zero………………………………. 28Stopping timer………………………………………… 28

Description of Parameters ………………………….. 31Device off……………………………………………………… 21DIAGNOSTICS ……………………………………………… 40Differential temperature control………………… 24Digital alarms ……………………………………………… 45Digital inputs ………………………………………………….8

Configuration Table…………………………………8polarity………………………………………………………..8Polarity table ………………………………………………8

Display …………………………………………………………. 10Drip time ……………………………………………………… 29Dynamic Set point ………………………………………. 21

Control parameters ………………………………… 22Modification depending on current input

with negative offset……………………………. 22Modification depending on current input

with positive offset……………………………… 22Modification depending on outdoor

temperature with negative offset……… 23Modification depending on outdoor

temperature with positive offset………. 22

Page 51: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 51

EElectrical heater parameters ……………………….38Electromechanical features………………………….46Energy 400 ………………………………………………………5Extension…………………………………………………………5Extension parameters …………………………………..39FFan configuration …………………………………………18

selection of output type…………………………..18Fan control configuration……………………………18Fan control in cool mode

diagram……………………………………………………..25Fan control in heat mode

diagram……………………………………………………..25Fan control parameters ……………………………….38Forbidden use ……………………………………………….47FUNCTIONS…………………………………………………..28GGLOSSARY ……………………………………………………..49HHeating………………………………………………………….21HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL …………………………4Hydraulic pump ……………………………………………19Hydraulic pump control……………………………….26

diagram……………………………………………………..26Hysteresis ………………………………………………………49IIcons for emphasis: …………………………………………4Impulse duration ………………………………………….18INSTALLATION ……………………………………………….6Internal fan …………………………………………………..19INTRODUCTION ……………………………………………..5KKeyboard……………………………………………………….10Keyboards ……………………………………………………….5Keys ……………………………………………………………….10

Mode …………………………………………………………10LLed …………………………………………………………………10List of alarms ………………………………………………..40Load control………………………………………………….23Loads……………………………………………………………..49Low voltage outputs ………………………………………9MManual reset …………………………………………………49Menu structure……………………………………………..13OOperating modes ………………………………………….21

configuration table…………………………………..21OR logico ………………………………………………………49Outputs …………………………………………………………..9PParallel electrical heaters…………………………….27Param Manager ……………………………………………..5

PARAMETERS ………………………………………………. 31Parameters table…………………………………………. 36Permanent memory…………………………………….. 49Permitted use ………………………………………………. 47Phase shift……………………………………………………. 18Physical quantities and units of measurement

…………………………………………………………………….9Pick-up …………………………………………………………. 18Power outputs…………………………………………………9

Configuration table…………………………………….9Polarity Table ……………………………………………9

Power step……………………………………………………. 15Programming parameters – Menu levels …… 11Pump parameters ……………………………………….. 38RRange …………………………………………………………… 49Recording hours of operation …………………….. 28References ……………………………………………………….4Regulation algorithm in cool mode…………… 23Regulation algorithm in heat mode ………….. 23Regulations………………………………………………….. 46Remote keyboard………………………………………… 11Reset …………………………………………………………….. 49Reset alarm………………………………………………….. 49RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKS……… 48Reversing valve ……………………………………………. 19Reversing valve control……………………………….. 27Reversing valves…………………………………………… 19SSafety timing ……………………………………………….. 17Scroll down ………………………………………………….. 49Scroll up ………………………………………………………. 49selection ………………………………………………………….9Serial Interface (EWTK)…………………………………..5Serial outputs………………………………………………….9Set Point ………………………………………………………. 49Setting set points ………………………………………… 21Stand-by …………………………………………………21; 49SUMMARY ………………………………………………………2Supplementary electrical heaters ………………. 27SYSTEM CONFIGURATION………………………….. 15TTabella Allarmi……………………………………………. 41Technical data…………………………………………….. 46TECHNICAL FEATURES………………………………… 46TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONS……… 21UUnit of measurement: …………………………………….9USE OF THE DEVICE …………………………………….. 47USER INTERFACE …………………………………………. 10VVisibility of parameters and submenus ……… 14WWall-mounted keyboard…………………………….. 11

Page 52: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 52

Page 53: Microtech Energy 400

Microtech s.r.l.via dell’Industria, 15Zona Industriale Paludi32010 Pieve d’Alpago (BL)ITALY

Telephone +39 0437 986444Facsimile +39 0437 986163Email [email protected] http:/www.microtech.com

An Invensys company

Page 1: Microtech Energy 400

electronic controller for Chiller/Heat pump up to 4 steps

technical user manual

ENERGY 400 -PRELIMINARY-

Page 2: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 2

1 SUMMARY

1 SUMMARY …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………22 How to use this manual ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..43 Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………5

3.1 Components …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 53.1.1 Energy 400 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.2 Extension……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………53.1.3 Keyboards………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53.1.4 CF (Control Fan) Modules…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.5 Copy Card………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.7 Param Manager ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5

4 Installation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..64.1 Connection diagrams…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 64.2 Configuration of analogue inputs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 64.3 Configuration of digital inputs……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 84.4 Configuration of outputs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9

4.4.1 Power outputs………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….94.4.2 Low voltage outputs ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..94.4.3 Serial outputs…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9

4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9User Interface…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………10

5.1 Keys………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..105.2 Display …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10

5.2.1 Display……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..105.2.2 Led……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10

5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………115.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels……………………………………………………………………………………………………………115.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus………………………………………………………………………………………………………………14

5.5.1 Copy Card……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….14

6 System configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………..156.1 Compressors ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….156.2 Compressor configuration……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………15

6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….166.2.2 Compressor timing ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..17

6.3 Condensation fan………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….186.3.1 Fan configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..186.3.2 Fan control configuration ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..18

6.4 Reversing valves…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.5 Hydraulic pump…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters …………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.7 Internal fan……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………196.8 Condensation-Defrost probes……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..19

7 Temperature control functions………………………………………………………………………………………….217.1 Setting set points ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….217.2 Dynamic Set point ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..217.3 Load control ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….23

7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithm ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..237.3.2 Condensation fan control ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..247.3.3 Combined or Separate Condensation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….267.3.4 Hydraulic pump control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………267.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..277.3.6 Reversing valve control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..27

8 Functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………288.1 Recording hours of operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………28

Page 3: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 3

8.2 Defrost …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..288.2.1 Defrost start …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..288.2.2 Control during defrost……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….298.2.3 Defrost end …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….29

9 Parameters ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………319.1 Description of Parameters ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………319.2 Parameters table…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..36

10 Diagnostics ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4010.1 List of alarms…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………40

11 Technical features…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….4611.1 Technical data………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4611.2 Electromechanical features ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….4611.3 Regulations……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………46

12 Use of the device ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4712.1 Permitted use ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..4712.2 Forbidden use………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47

13 Responsibility and residual risks ………………………………………………………………………………………..4814 Glossary……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………49

Page 4: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 4

2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUALx

This manual is designed to permit quick, easy reference with the following features:

References column:A column to the left of the text contains references to subjects discussed in the text to help you locate the information youneed quickly and easily.

Cross references:All words written in italics are referenced in the subject index to help you find the page containing details on this subject;supposing you read the following text:”when the alarm is triggered, the compressors will be shut down”The italics mean that you will find a reference to the page on the topic of compressors listed under the item compressorsin the index.If you are consulting the manual “on-line” (using a computer), words which appear in italics are hyperlinks: just click on aword in italics with the mouse to go directly to the part of the manual that discusses this topic.

Some segments of text are marked by icons appearing in the references column with the meanings specified below:

Take note: information on the topic under discussion which the user ought to keep in mind

Tip: a recommendation which may help the user to understand and make use of the information supplied onthe topic under discussion.

Warning! : information which is essential for preventing negative consequences for the system or a hazard topersonnel, instruments, data, etc., and which users MUST read with care.

References

Cross references

Icons foremphasis:

Page 5: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 5

3 INTRODUCTIONx

Energy 400 is a compact device that permits control of air conditioning units of the following types:• air-air• air-water• water-water• motor-condensing

The controller can manage machines with up to four power steps distributed in a maximum of 2 cooling circuits (forexample, 2 circuits, with 2 compressors per circuit).

Main characteristics:• Outflowing water temperature control• Condensation control• 2 inputs which may be configured for NTC or 4-20mA (through parameters)• 11 configurable digital inputs + (4 four optional)• Dynamic set point• Setting of parameters from the keyboard, with a personal computer or with a interface module• Remote keyboard (100 m) which may be connected up directly without serial interfaces.• 3 4-20 mA outputs• Control of 1, 2, 3, or 4 compressors.

3.1 Components

We will now look at the basic components and accessories in the system and how they are connected.

3.1.1 Energy 400The basic module is an electronic card for connection with I/O resources and a CPU as described in the section onconnection diagrams.

3.1.2 ExtensionThe basic module is an electronic card for connection as described in the section on connection diagrams.

3.1.3 KeyboardsTwo types of keyboard are available:• TS-P: Panel keyboard (32×74)• TS-W: Wall-mounted keyboard

3.1.4 CF (Control Fan) ModulesUsed to connect fans with Energy 400 low voltage outputs.

3.1.5 Copy CardCan be used to upload and download the Energy 400 parameter map.

3.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK)A device which permits the controller to interface with a Personal Computer

It must be connected up as illustrated in the figure

The PC must be connected with the interface module, and the interface module with the device, with no poweron to any of the devices, and in compliance with current safetyregulations . Be careful to avoid electrostaticshocks, especially on exposed metal parts of the devices; allow electrostatic shocks to discharge into the groundbefore handling.

3.1.7 Param ManagerIf you have an adequate Personal Computer with Windows 95 or a more recent operating system, the Param Managersoftware, an adequate interface module and proper wiring, you can have full control over all Energy 400 parameters viaPersonal Computer.The instrument can be programmed easily and quickly using a series of interfaces which permit a logical, guided approach.

Page 6: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 6

4 INSTALLATIONx

Before proceeding with any operation, first make sure that you have connected up the power supply to thedevice through an appropriate external current trransformer.Always follow these rules when connecting boards to one another and to the application:Never apply loads which exceed the limits set forth in these specifications to outputs;Always comply with connection diagrams when connecting up loads;To prevent electrical couplings, always wire low voltage loads separately from high voltage loads;

4.1 Connection diagrams

Basic module

Detail of connectors

Instrument configuration is determined by the values of the parameters associated with inputs and outputs.

4.2 Configuration of analogue inputs

There are 6 analogue inputs:• 4 NTC transducers,• 2 configurable NTC/4-20mA transducers.

Analogue inputs

Page 7: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 7

The following devices shall henceforth be referred to by the codes ST1….ST4:ST1 – Temperature control probe: inflowing water or air, reading range : -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST2 – Configurable probe, reading range: -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST3 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mAST4 — Configurable probe, reading range : -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST5 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mAST6 — Configurable probe, reading range: -30°C ÷ 90°C;

4 analogue inputs are available on the extension which is not used in this release.The resolution of NTC analogue inputs is one tenth of a Kelvin degree;They are precise to within 0.8°C within the range of 0÷35°C and to within 0.8°C ÷ 3°C in the remainder of the scale.The 4-20mA input is precise to within 1% FS, with a resolution of one tenth of a Kelvin degree, if the input is configured asa dynamic set point, or Kpa*10 if the input is configured as a pressure probe.

ST1-ST6 probes can be configured according to the following table:

Value Pa. Description 0 1 2 3 4 5

H11 Configuration ofanalogue inputST1

Probeabsent

NTC input inflowingwater or air

Digital inputrequest forheating

Digital inputrequest fortemperaturecontrol

DifferentialNTC input

Not permitted

H12 Configuration ofanalogue inputST2

Probeabsent

NTC inputoutflowingwater/air,anti-freeze

Digital inputrequest forcooling

Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted

H13 Configuration ofanalogue inputST3

Probeabsent

NTC inputcondensation

4…20 mAcondensationinput

4…20 mAinput fordynamic setpoint

NTCantifreeze forwater-watergas reversalmachines

NTC heatingcontrol forwater-waterwater reversalmachines

H14 Configuration ofanalogue inputST4

Probeabsent

NTC inputcondensation

Multifunctional digital input

NTC input foroutdoortemperature

Not permitted Not permitted

H15 Configuration ofanalogue inputST5

Probeabsent

NTC inputoutflowingwater/air

Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted

H16 Configuration ofanalogue inputST6

Probeabsent

NTC inputcondensationcircuit 2

4-20mA inputcondensation

Not permitted Antifreezeinput forwater-watergas reversalmachines

Not permitted

If inputs ST3 and ST6 are defined as 4-20mA inputs under pressure, the scale bottom value of the pressure input is alsosignificant:Pa H17= Maximum input value; set the corresponding value to a current of 20 mA

Analogue inputs:resolution and

precision

Analogue inputs:configuration

table

Page 8: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 8

4.3 Configuration of digital inputs

There are 11 voltage-free digital inputs, which will henceforth be identified as ID1….ID11.ST1, ST2, and ST4 may be added to these if they are configured as digital inputs (through parameters Pa H11, Pa H12, PaH14). 4 more digital inputs are available on the extension.

The polarity of digital inputs is determined by the parameters listed below:ID1, ID2, ID3, ID4 defined by parameter Pa H18,ID5, ID6, ID7, ID8 defined by parameter Pa H19ID9, ID10, ID11, ST4 (if configured as digital) defined by parameter Pa H20ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15 on extension defined by parameter Pa N01

ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4

Pa H18Pa H19Pa H20Pa H21 ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15

0 Closed Closed Closed Closed1 Open Closed Closed Closed2 Closed Open Closed Closed3 Open Open Closed Closed4 Closed Closed Open Closed5 Open Closed Open Closed6 Closed Open Open Closed7 Open Open Open Closed8 Closed Closed Closed Open9 Open Closed Closed Open10 Closed Open Closed Open11 Open Open Closed Open12 Closed Closed Open Open13 Open Closed Open Open14 Closed Open Open Open15 Open Open Open Open

Example: A value of “10” for parameter Pa H18 indicates that digital inputs ID1 and ID3 are active when their contacts areclosed and digital inputs ID2 and ID4 are active when their contacts are open:

Pa H18 ID1 ID2 ID3 ID410 Closed Open Closed Open

If ST1 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H21If ST2 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H22

Parameter Value Description

0 Active if closed1 Active if open

All digital inputs are configurable and may be given the meanings listed below by setting parameters Pa H23 through PaH34 and Pa N02 through Pa N05

Parameter Value Description

0 Input disabled1 Flow switch2 Remote OFF3 Remote Heat/Cool4 Thermal switch compressor 15 Thermal switch compressor 26 Thermal switch compressor 37 Thermal switch compressor 48 Thermal switch fan circuit 19 Thermal switch fan circuit 210 High pressure circuit 111 High pressure circuit 212 Low pressure circuit 113 Low pressure circuit 214 High pressure compressor 115 High pressure compressor 216 High pressure compressor 317 High pressure compressor 418 End of defrost circuit 119 End of defrost circuit 2

In the case of multiple inputs configured with the same value, the function associated with the input will carry out aLogical OR among the inputs.

Digital inputs

Digital inputs:polarity

Digital inputs:Polarity table

Digital inputs:Configuration

Table

Outputs

Page 9: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 9

4.4 Configuration of outputs

There are two basic types of outputs: power outputs, and low voltage outputs.

4.4.1 Power outputsThere are 8 power outputs, which shall henceforth be referred to as RL1…RL8 (relays).RL1 — compressor 1, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL2 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL3 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL4 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL5 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL6 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL7 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL8 – cumulative alarm, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

There are 2 additional digital outputs in the extension module:RL9 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL10 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;

Configurable outputs may be given the following meanings by setting parameters Pa H35 through Pa H40 and Pa N06through Pa N07

Value Description0 Disabled1 Reversal valve circuit 12 Reversal valve circuit 23 Condenser fan circuit 14 Condenser fan circuit 25 Electrical heater 16 Electrical heater 27 Pump8 Evaporator fan9 Power Step 210 Power Step 311 Power Step 4

Polarity of RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5,RL8 may be selected using Pa H41-Pa H45

Parameter Value Description

0 Relay closed if output active1 Relay open if output not active

If multiple outputs are configured with the same resource, the outputs will be activated in parallel.

4.4.2 Low voltage outputsThere are a total of 4 low voltage outputs available: 2 phase cut outputs and 2 4-20 mA outputs:TK1 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 1.TK2 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 2.AN1 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 1AN2 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 2

Outputs AN1 and AN2, though their connections are physically separate, are alternatives to outputs TK1 and TK2 which areselected by parameters Pa H45 and Pa H46

Fan config. parameter Index Value 0 Value 1

Fan 1 output H45 Fan 1 output in phase cut Fan 1 output in 4-20 mAFan 2 output H46 Fan 2 output in phase cut Fan 2 output in 4-20 mA

4.4.3 Serial outputsThere are 2 asynchronous serials on the control:• channel for serial communication with a personal computer through a Microtech interface module• channel for serial communication with a standard Microtech keyboard. Power supply 12 VDC (2400,e,8,1).

4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement

Parameter Pa H64 may be used to set temperature display in either degrees °C or degrees °F:

Pa H64 Unit ofmeasurement

0 Degrees °C1 Degrees °F

Configurationtable

Polarity Table

Configuration offan outputs

Unit ofmeasurement:

selection

Page 10: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 10

5 USER INTERFACEx

The interface on the front panel of the instrument can be used to carry out all the operations connected to the use of theinstrument, and in particular to:• Set operating mode• Respond to alarm situations• Check the state of resources

Front panel of the instrument

The instrument can function without the aid of a keyboard

5.1 Keys

Selects operating mode:

If the heating mode is enabled, each time the key is pressed the following sequence occurs:Stand-by -àà cooling àà heating àà stand-by

if heating mode is not enabled:Stand-by àà cooling àà stand-by

In menu mode, this key acts as a SCROLL UP or UP key (increasing value).

Resets alarms, and turns the instrument on and off.

Press once to reset all manually reset alarms not currently active; all the alarm events per hour will also be reset even if thealarms are not active.Hold down the key for 2 seconds to turn the instrument from on to off or vice versa. When it is off, only the decimal pointremains on the display. In menu mode this key acts as a SCROLL DOWN or DOWN key (decreasing value).

Pressing the “mode” and “on-off” keys at the same time:

If you press both keys at the same time and then release within 2 seconds, you will move one level deeper in the displaymenu.If you press both keys for more than 2 seconds you will move one level up.If you are currently viewing the lowest level in the menu and you press both keys and release within 2 seconds, you will goup one level.

5.2 Display

The device can communicate information of all kinds on its status, configuration, and alarms through a display and anumber of leds on its front panel.

5.2.1 DisplayNormal display shows:• regulation temperature in tenths of degrees celsius or fahrenheit• the alarm code, if at least one alarm is active. If multiple alarms are active, the one with greater priority will be

displayed, according to the Table of Alarms.• If temperature control is not analogue and depends on the status of a digital input (ST1 or ST2 configured as digital

inputs), the “On” or “Off” label will be displayed, depending on whenther temperature control is active or not.• When in menu mode, the display depends on the current position; labels and codes are used to help the user identify

the current function.

5.2.2 LedLed 1 compressore 1.ON if compressor 1 is active• OFF if compressor 1 if off• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if compressor is currently set to defrost

Power step 2 ledON if power step 2 is active

Keyboard

Mode

Page 11: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 11

• OFF if power step 2 is not active• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if step 2 is currently defrosting

Led step 3 di potenzaON se lo step 3 di potenza è attivo• OFF se lo step 3 di potenza non è attivo• BLINK veloce se sono in corso temporizzazioni di sicurezza• BLINK lento se step 3 in sbrinamento

Power step 4 led• ON if power step 4 is active• OFF if power step 4 is not active• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if step 4 is defrosting

Electrical heater/boiler led• ON if at least one internal anti-freeze electrical heater or boiler is enabled• OFF if both are off

Heating Led• ON if the device is in heating mode.

Cooling Led• ON if the controller is in cooling mode

If neither the HEATING led nor the COOLING led are in, the controller is in STAND-BY mode.When it is off, only the decimal point appears on the display .

5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard

The remote keyboard a on the display is an exact copy of the information displayed on the instrument, with the same leds;Remote keyboard

It performs exactly the same functions as those described in the display section.The only difference is in use of the UP and DOWN keys (to increase and decrease value), which are separate from theMODE and ON/OFF keys.

5.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels

Device parameters may be modified using a Personal Computer (with the required software, interface key and cables), orusing the keyboard;If using the keyboard, access to parameters is arranged in a hierarchy of levels which may be accessed by pressing the“mode and “on-off” keys at the same time (as described above).Each menu level is identified by a mnemonic code which appears on the display.The structure is set up as shown in the diagram below:

Remote keyboard

Page 12: Microtech Energy 400

Page 13: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 13

Menu structure

Control probeCurrent alarm

Set point:

Analogue Inp.:

Alarms:

Digital input:

Op. hours:

Password:

Parameters:

Label cooling set:

Label heating set:

Input code.: —

Current alarms Code:

Input code: —

Value heating set

Value cooling set

Configuration par.:

Compressor par.:

Fan control par.:

Alarms par.:

Pump par.:

Antifreeze par.:

Defrost par.:

Par. index —

Parameter value

Number of hours par.

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Parameter value

Comp. hours: —

Password value

Status of digital input

Val. analogue input

Par. index —

Par. index —

Par. index —

Par. index —

Par. index —

Par. index —

Pump hours: Number of hours par.

Page 14: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 14

5.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus

With a personal computer, interface key, suitable cables and the “Param Manager” software, it is possible to restrict thevisibility and modification of parameters and entire submenus.A “visibility value” may be assigned to each parameter, as described below:

Value Meaning0003 Parameter or label visible at all times0258 Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password = Pa

H46)0770 Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password = Pa

H46). Parameter cannot be modified.0768 Parameter visible from PC only.

Some visibility settings are factory set.For more information, please refer to the “ Param Manager” instructions.

5.5.1 Copy Card

The copy card can store the whole map of Energy 400 parameters;To download the map present in the copy card, proceed as follows:1. Connect the key to the appropriate Energy 400 output (refer to connection diagrams) while the device is off.2. Turn on the Energy 400 : the parameters map in the copy card will be copied to the Energy 400.

To store the Energy 400 parameters map in memory, proceed as follows:1. Connect the copy card to the appropriate Energy 400 output (refer to connection diagrams) while the device is on.2. From the keyboard, access the “password” submenu (refer to menu structure) and set the value contained in

parameter Pa H46: The instrument’s map will be downloaded to the copy card.3. Disconnect the copy card when finished.

Page 15: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 15

6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONx

In this section we will look at how to configure parameters for various loads on the basis of the type of installation to becontrolled.

6.1 Compressors

Energy 400 can control systems consisting of up to two cooling circuits with 1 to 4 compressors.If there is a capacity step, it will be considered as a compressor.Each compressor is piloted by a device relay (power outputs) (each capacity step requires an additional output).The first compressor must be connected to output RL1; the remaining outputs (RL2…RL7) (RL9…RL10 on extension) may beassigned at will, setting the value of the parameters Pa H35 …. PaH40 (Pa N06 … Pa N07 if there is no extension).The compressors will be turned on or off depending on the temperatures detected and the temperature control functionsthat have been set (refer to the section on Compressor controls – Regulation algorithml )

6.2 Compressor configuration

The turning on of an additional compressor (or capacity step) will henceforth be referred to as a Power step (power level).

The following configurations are available for compressors without capacity steps:

Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1) 2 (Pa H06=2) 3 (Pa H06=3) 4 (Pa H06=4)

1(Pa

H05=1)

RL1=comp. 1 circ.1 RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2circ.1Step3 = comp 3circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1Step3 = comp 3 circ.1Step4 = comp 4 circ.1

Num

ber o

f circ

uits

2(Pa

H05=2)

RL1=Comp. 1 circ.1Step3 = comp. 1 circ.2

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1Step3 = comp 1 circ.2Step4 = comp 2 circ.2

Configuration error Configuration error

The following configurations are available for compressors with 1 capacity step (Pa H07=1):

Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1) 2 (Pa H06=2)

1(Pa

H05=1)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1Step3 = comp.2 circ.1Step4 = cap. step1 Comp.2 circ.1

Num

ber o

f circ

uits

2(Pa

H05=2)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step3 = comp.1 circ.2Step4 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.2

Configuration error

The following configurations are available for compressors with 2 or 3 capacity steps (Pa H07=2 or Pa H07=3):

Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1 and Pa H07=2) 2 (Pa H06=2 and Pa H07=3)

1(Pa

H05=1)

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step4 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1

RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step3 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1Step4 = cap. step3 comp.1 circ.1

Num

bero

of c

ircui

ts

2(pa

H05=2)

Configuration error Configuration error

Power step

Simplecompressors

with 1 capacitystep

with 2 or 3capacity steps

Page 16: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 16

6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequencesDepending on the temperature conditions detected by the probes, the temperature control functions of the “Energy 400”may request turning on and off of compressors/capacity steps (power steps).The sequence in which compressors/capacity steps (steps) are turned on and off may be determined by adjusting thevalues of parameters Pa H08 and Pa H09 as described below:

Parameter valuePar Description 0 1

Pa H08 Power step on sequence Depends on number of hours ofoperation

Unvaried on sequence

Pa H09 Circuit balacing Circuit saturation Circuit balancing

When on sequences depend on the number of hours of operation, of 2 available compressors, the one which has beenoperated for less hours will come on first, and the one which has been operated for more hours will always go off first. Inan unvaried on sequence, the compressor with the lower number will always come on first (compressor 1 beforecompressor 2) and the compressor with the higher number will always go off first.

The circuit balancing parameter is significant only if there are 2 circuits and 2 steps per circuit. If we select H09=0, allpower steps in one circuit will come on before those in the other circuit. If H09=1 (balancing), power steps will come on insuch a way that both circuits are delivering the same power, or the difference is no more than one step.

Let us take a closer look at the various combinations:

Pa H08=0 Pa H09=0CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER

CIRCUIT:CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUIT:

The compressor with the least hours of operation comes onfirst, then the capacity step for the same circuit, thecompressor on the other circuit, and, lastly, its capacity step.When turning off, the capacity step of the compressor withthe most hours of operation goes off first, then thecorresponding compressor, then the other capacity step andfinally the other compressor.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2Ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep4ààRL1ààStep2and go off in this orderStep2ààRL1ààStep4ààStep3

If all compressors are off to start with, the circuit which hasthe lower average number of hours for all its compressorswill come on first. In this circuit the compressor with theleast hours of operation will come on first, followed by theother compressor in the same circuit: thus the circuit issaturated. The next step is chosen between the twocompressors in the other circuit with fewer hours.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2Ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2hours comp.4 > hours comp.3(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 +hours comp.3)/2 they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep4ààStep2ààRL1and go off in this orderRL1ààStep2ààStep4ààStep3

Pa H08=0 and Pa H09=1CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER

CIRCUIT:CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUIT

The compressor with the least hours of operation comes onfirst, followed by the compressor in the other circuit, thecapacity step of the first circuit to come on, and, lastly, theother capacity step. When going off, the capacity step of thecompressor with the most hours goes off first, followed bythe capacity step of the other compressor, the compressorwith the most hours and, lastly, the remaining compressor.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2they will come on in this orderStep3ààRL1ààStep4ààStep2and go off in this orderStep2ààStep4ààRL1ààStep3

If all compressors are off to start with, the circuit with thelower average number of hours for its compressors will comeon first. The average is calculated as the ratio between thetotal number of hours of the compressors available and thenumber of compressors in the circuit. In this circuit, thecompressor with the least hours will come on first, then thecompressor in the other circuit with the least hours, theother compressor in the first circuit and, lastly, theremaining compressor.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as followsRL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2hours comp.4 > hours comp.3(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 +hours comp.3)/2 they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep2ààStep4ààRL1and go off in this orderRL1ààStep4ààStep2ààStep3

Compressors:coming on on thebasis of hours of

operation andcircuit saturation

Compressors:coming on on thebasis of hours of

operation andcircuit balancing

Page 17: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 17

Pa H08=1 and Pa H09=0CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUITThe compressor con with the lower number comes on first,then its capacity step, then the compressor in the othercircuit and, lastly, its capacity step. The capacity step for thecompressor with the highest number is the first to go off,followed by the capacity step of the other compressor, andfinally the compressor.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2they will come on in this orderRL1ààStep2ààStep3ààStep4and go off in this orderStep4ààStep3ààStep2ààRL1

Exactly the same as the first case.

Pa H08=1 e Pa H09=1CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUITThe compressor with the lowest number comes on first,then the compressor in the other circuit, the capacity stepof the first compressor and then the capacity step of thesecond compressor. They go off in reverse order.

Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2they will come on in this orderRL1ààStep3ààStep2ààStep4and go off in this orderStep4ààStep2ààStep3ààRL1

Exactly the same as the first case.

In the unvaried sequence, if the compressor with the lower number is unavailable, the compressor with the higher numbercomes on.If the compressor comes available and the amount of power required is equal to the amount of power being delivered,the machine will continue to function in its current state: it will not turn off a compressor with a higher number to turn ona compressor with a lower number.

A compressor is unavailable when it is shut down due to an alarm or is currently counting safety timing.

6.2.2 Compressor timingThe turning on and off of compressors must comply with safety times which may be set by the user using the parametersspecified below:

There is a safety interval between the time a compressor goes off and the time the same compressor comes back on(compressor on…off safety time, controlled by parameter Pa C01);This interval of time must elapse when the “Energy 400” is turned on.

There is a safety interval between the time a compressor is turned on and the time it is turned on again (compressoron…on safety time, controlled by parameter Pa C02) .

If the machine has multiple power steps, there are intervals of time which must pass between turning on of 2 compressors(Pa C06) and turning off of 2 compressors (Pa C07). An amount of time determined by parameter Pa C08 (capacity step ondelay) must elapse between the turning on of one compressor or capacity step and the turning on of any other

Compressors:unvaried on

sequence withcircuit saturation

Compressors:unvaried on

sequence withcircuit balancing

Safety timing

Off-on timing

On-on timing

Off-on and on-ondiagram for 1

compressor

On-on off-offtimes for 2 comp.

Compressor

ON

OFF

OFF – ON safety timePa C01

Seconds*10

ON – ON safety timePa C02

Page 18: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 18

compressor or capacity step on the machine. The greatest of the currently active safety times must be applied to eachcompressor.The off time interval between compressors is not applied in the event of a compressor shutdown alarm, in which casethey stop immediately.

6.3 Condensation fan

“Energy 400” may be connected with two types of fan piloting unit:

• Triak• 4-20 mA

6.3.1 Fan configurationFirst of all, correctly configure the type of analogue output (low voltage outputs) to which the fan control module(s) areconnected;the relevant parameters are Pa H45 for the first circuit and Pa H46 for the second circuit, as shown in the table below:

Parameter value Circuit 1 – Pa H45 Circuit 2 – Pa H460 TK output enabled for phase

cutTK output enabled for phasecut

1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN2

If the output is configured as a proportional triac, the parameters PICK-UP, PHASE SHIFT, and IMPULSE DURATION are alsosignificant.

Every time the external fan is started up, power is supplied to the exchanger fan at maximum voltage, and the fan operatesat maximum speed, for an amount of time equal to Pa F02 seconds; after this time the fan operates at the speed set bythe regulator.Pa F02 = Fan pick-up time (seconds)

Determines a delay during which it is possible to compensate the different electrical characteristics of the fan drivemotors:Pa F03 = duration of fan phase shift expressed as a percentage.

Determines the duration of the TK output piloting impulse in microseconds*10Pa F04= triak piloting impulse duration

6.3.2 Fan control configurationThe fan control may be configured to supply a proportionate output (0-100%) or to function as “ON OFF” by setting thevalue of the parameter Pa F01:

Pa F01 = Selection of control output typePa F01 = 0 proportionate fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on

parameters)Pa F01 = 1 fan “on-off” output; in this mode the control performs the same

calculations as in proportionate output, but if the outcome isgreater than 0, the control output will be 100.

Pa F01 = 2 on-off operation as called by compressor. In this mode output is 0if no compressor is on in the circuit, or 100% if at least onecompressor in the circuit is on

on-on and off-offdiagram 2 comp

Pick-up

Phase shift

Impulse duration

Fan configuration:selection ofoutput type

Comp.1

ON

OFF

Interval betweenturning offcompressors Pa C07

Seconds

Interval between turning oncompressors Pa C05

Comp.2ON

OFF

Seconds

Page 19: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 19

If some of the relays are configured as condensation fan outputs (Pa H35- Pa H40 and Pa N06- Pa N07=3 or 4), they willbe on if the control output for each fan is greater than 0; otherwise, they will be off.

6.4 Reversing valves

The reversing valve is used only when operating in “heat pump” mode.“Energy 400” can control up to 2 reversing valves in a dual circuit system.

The reversing valve in circuit 1 is active only if:• a relay (power output) is configured as reversing valve for circuit 1 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 1).

The reversing valve in circuit 2 is active only if:• a relay (power output) is configured as reversing valve for circuit 2 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 2)• there are 2 circuits

Both of them will be active only ifthe heat pump is in operation (Pa H10=1 )

6.5 Hydraulic pump

The hydraulic pump is active only if at least one relay (power output) is configured as pump output (Pa H35-Pa H40 or PaN06-Pa N07= 7 ) .

The pump may be configured to function independently of the compressor or whenever called up using parameter Pa P01 :

Pa P01 = Pump operating mode0=continuous operation1=operation when called up by regulation algorithm

with a flow switch alarm (table of alarms) which is active with automatic reset, the pump will be on even if the compressisoff.

6.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters

“Energy 400” can control up to 2 anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters.

The electrical heater output is active only if the relays (power outputs) are configured as electrical heaters 1 or 2 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06-Pa N07= 5 or 6) .If configured in this way, the outputs will command the electrical heater to come on or go off, depending on theparameters of configuration of electrical heaters Pa R01 … Pa R06, as described below:

ValueParameter Description0 1

Pa R01 Defrost configuration comes on only when requested bycontrol

always on during defrost

Pa R02 Cooling modeconfiguration

off during cooling on during cooling (depending on anti-freeze electrical heater control)

Pa R03 Heating modeconfiguration

off during heating on during heating (depending on anti-freeze electrical heater control)

Pa R06 OFF or STAND-BYconfiguration

off when OFF or on STAND-BY Electrical heaters on when OFF or onSTAND-BY

Parameters r04 and r05 determine which probe the electrical heaters will control.Each of the two electrical heaters may be set to any one of probes ST1, ST2 or ST5.If the is absent or configured as a digital input, the electrical heaters will always be off.

Pa r04 configuration probe set to electrical heater 1Pa r05 configuration probe set to electrical heater 2

ValueParameters

Description

0 Electrical heater off1 Set to ST12 Set to ST23 Set to ST5

6.7 Internal fan

The fan output will be active only if one relay is configured as evaporator fan output.The output is ON if at least one compressor is ON; otherwise it is off. During defrost the output is always off.

6.8 Condensation-Defrost probes

“Energy 400” can control defrosting of one or more circuits depending on system configuration.

Defrost is enabled if:• stated by the “Enable defrost” parameter (Pa d01 = 1)

Reversing valve

configuration

probeconfiguration

Page 20: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 20

• the condensation probe for circuit 1 is present (connected to analogue input ST3) and the relative parameter Pa H13= 1 (in the case of an NTC probe) or Pa H13 = 2 (in the case of a 4-20mA probe) and ST4 = 1

• the reversing valve is present

In the case of a dual circuit system, defrost may be separate or combined (this will be the case of a system with a singlecondenser) depending on the setting of the parameterPa F22 : condensation type

0 1Pa F22: condensation type Separate condensers Combined condensation

Defrost end and start depends on the values of the condensation probes, which may be configured as follows:

Let SCC1 be the condensation probe of circuit 1; it may be connected to analogue input ST3 or ST4;depending on the type of probe, the configuration will be as shown in the table below:

Probe connectionProbe type Probe connected to

ST3Probe connected toST4

SCC1 NTC type Pa H13 = 1 Pa H14 = 1SCC1 4-20mA type Pa H13 = 2 —

The following table applies to a dual circuit system:

1 circuit 2 circuits, separatedefrost

2 circuits, combineddefrost (*)

Defrost circuit 1 SCC1 SCC1 MIN(SCC1;ST6)Defrost circuit 2 — ST6 MIN(SCC1;ST6)

(*) If A and B are control probes, MIN(A;B) representsthe smaller of A and B, if A and B are declared present.It will be value A if B is not declared present.It is impossible for A not to be declared present.

separate orcombined

condensation

probeconfiguration

Page 21: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 21

7 TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONSx

Once ”Energy 400” has been configured, loads may be controlled on the basis of temperature and pressure conditionsdetected by probes and temperature control functions which may be defined using the appropriate parameters.

There are 4 possible operating modes:• cooling• heating• stand-by• off

Cooling: this is the “summer” operating mode; the machine is configured for cooling.

Heating: this is the “winter” operating mode; the machine is configured for heating.

Stand-by: the machine does not govern any temperature control function; it continues to signal alarms

Off: machine is turned off.

The operating mode is determined by settings entered on the keyboard and by the following

Parameters:Configuration parameter ST1 (Pa H11) ( refer to Analogue inputs: configuration table)Configuration parameter ST2 (Pa H12) ( refer to Analogue inputs: configuration table)Operating mode selection parameter (Pa H49)Heat pump parameter (Pa H10 )

Operating mode selection parameter (Pa H49)0= Selection from keyboard1= Selection from digital input (refer to digital inputs)

Heat pump parameter (Pa H10)0 = Heat pump not present1 = Heat pump present

Combinations of these parameters will generate the following rules:

Operating mode Mode selectionparameterPa H49

Configurationparameter ST1Pa H11

Configurationparameter ST2Pa H12

Mode selection from keyboard 0 Other than 2 Other than 2Mode selection from digital input. 1 Other than 2 Other than 2If input ST1 is on, operating mode is heating; ifnot, stand-by

Any 2 Other than 2

If input ST2 is on, operating mode is cooling; ifnot, stand-by

Any Other than 2 2

If input ST1 is on, operating mode is heating; ifinput ST2 is on, operating mode is cooling; if ST1and ST2 are both on, there is a control error; ifneither is on, operating mode is stand-by

Any 2 2

7.1 Setting set points

Unless the machine is configured as a motor condenser, loads will come on and go off dynamically depending on thetemperature control functions set, the temperature/pressure values detected by the probes, and the set points that havebeen set:

There are two set point values:Cooling Set point: this is the set point used as a reference when the device is in cooling modeHeating Set point: this is the set point used as a reference when the device is in heating mode

The set points may be modified from the keyboard by accessing the “SET” submenu (refer to menu structure).

Their values must fall within a range determined by parameters Pa H02 – Pa H01 (Heating) and Pa H04 – Pa H03 (Cooling).

7.2 Dynamic Set point

The regulation algorithm may be used to modify the set point automatically on the basis of outdoor conditions.This modification is achieved by adding a positive or negative offset value to the set point, depending on:• 4-20 mA analogue input (proportionate to a signal set by the user)or• temperature of outdoor probe

This function has two purposes: to save energy, or to operate the machine under particularly harsh outdoor temperatureconditions.

The dynamic set point is active if:• Activation parameter Pa H50 = 1

Operating modes

Cooling

Heating

Stand-by

Device off

Operating modes:configuration

table

Page 22: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 22

• Probe ST3 (analogue inputs) is configured as a dynamic set point input (Pa H13 = 3) or probe ST4 (analogue inputs) isconfigured as an outdoor probe (Pa H14 = 3)

Parameters for control of the dynamic set point:• Pa H51= max. offset during cooling.• Pa H52= max. offset during heating• Pa H53= Outdoor temperature set point during cooling• Pa H54= Outdoor temperature set point during heating• Pa H55= Delta of cooling temperature• Pa H56= Delta of heating temperature

The interaction of these parameters is illustrated in the graphs below:

Positive Offset (H32>0 or H33>0)

Negative Offset (H32<0 or H33<0)

Positive Offset

Controlparameters

Modificationdepending on

current input withpositive offset

Modificationdepending on

current input withnegative offset

Modificationdepending on

outdoortemperature with

positive offset

OffsetSet point

Current20 mA4 mA

Maxoffset

Current

20 mA4 mA

Maxoffset

Temp.

Delta <0

Outdoor temp. setpoint (H53 orH54)

Delta >0

Page 23: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 23

Offset Negativo

7.3 Load control

We will now look at how to set parameters for load control on the basis of temperature/pressure conditions detected byprobes.

7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithmThe regulation algorithm calculates the load to be supplied through the compressors for both heating and cooling.

REGULATION ALGORITHM IN COOL MODEIf probe ST2 (analogue inputs) is not configured as a digital input for requests for cooling (Pa H11=2) or probeST1(analogue inputs) as a digital input for regulation algorithm requests (Pa H12=3), compressor management willdepend on ambient temperature and a SET POINT.

ST1 = temperature of inflowing water or inlet airSET COOL= cooling set point set from keyboard.Pa C03 = hysteresis of cooling thermostatPa C05 = delta of power step intervention

If Pa H011 = 3, the power step requested will depend on the status of input ST1 (analogue inputs).If Pa H012 = 2, the power step requested will depend on the status of input ST2 (analogue inputs).If probe ST5 (analogue inputs) is configured as a second step request (Pa H15 =2), the second step (power step) will berequested on the basis of this input. This function will be active only if either Pa H11=3 or Pa H12=2.Only motor condensers may be controlled, up to 2 steps only.

REGULATION ALGORITHM IN HEAT MODEIf probe ST1(analogue inputs) is not configured as a digital input for requests for heat (Pa H05=2) or digital input forrequests for regulation algorithm (Pa H05=3), compressor management will depend on• temperature ST3 (analogue inputs), if configuration parameter ST3 = 5 (for water/water manual reversal machines)• otherwise, temperature ST1(analogue inputs)• a HEATING set point which may be set from the keyboard

ST1/ST3 =Temperature of inflowing water or inlet air

Modificationdepending on

outdoortemperature with

negative offset

Regulationalgorithm in cool

mode

Cooling diagram

Regulationalgorithm in heat

mode

Temp.

Delta <0

Outdoor temp. setpoint. (H53 orH54)

Delta >0

Power

1st step

ST1Pa C03 Pa C03

2nd step

Pa C05 Pa C05 Pa C05

Pa C03 Pa C03

3rd step

4th step

Page 24: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 24

HEATING SET = Heating set point that has been setPa C04 = Heating thermostat hysteresisPa C05 = Delta of step intervention

If Pa H11 = 2-3, the compressors will be turned off and on depending on the status of input ST1.If probe ST5 (analogue inputs) is configured as a second step request (Pa H15 =2), the second step (power step) will berequested depending on this input. This function will be active only if Pa H11=2,3 or Pa H12=2.

DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLThis function may be used to control temperature according to both ST1(analogue inputs) and ST4 (analogue inputs). Thefunction will be active• if ST1 is configured as differential NTC input (Pa H11 = 4)• if ST4 is configured as outdoor temperature input (Pa H14 = 3)

In this case, the controller will not control on the basis of ST1, but on the basis of the difference between ST1-ST4; ifconfiguration parameter ST3 is equal to 5 (for water/water machines with manual reversal) in heating mode the controllerwill always control on the basis of ST3.Differential temperature control can be used, for instance, to maintain a constant difference in temperature between theoutdoor environment and a liquid being heated or cooled.

A compressor will always be off if:• It is not associated with a relay (power output)• The compressor has been shut down (refer to table of alarms)• Safety timing is in progress• The time lapse between pump on and compressor on is in progress (safety timing)• Preventilation is in progress in cooling mode• Energy 400 is in stand-by or off mode• The parameter for configuration of probe ST1 Pa H11 = 0 (probe absent)

7.3.2 Condensation fan controlCondensation control is dependent on the condensation temperature or pressure for the circuit.Fan control will be on if:• at least one probe per circuit is configured as a condensation probe (pressure or temperature); if not, the fan for the

circuit will come ON and go OFF in response to the circuit compressors.

Fan control may be independent of the compressor, or it may be carried out in response to requests from compressors;Operating mode is determined by parameter Pa F05:

Value0 1

Pa F05:fan output mode

if all compressors in the circuit are off,the fan is off

condensation control is independentof the compressor

The cut-off is bypassed for an amount of time equal to Pa F12 after the compressor is turned on. If the control requestscut-off during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.

If parameter Pa F05 is set to 1, condensation control will be dependent on condensation temperature or pressure,depending on how the following parameters are set:

CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL IN COOL MODEPa F06 = Minimum fan speed in COOL mode;Pa F07 = Maximum silent fan speed in COOL modePa F08 = Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in COOL modePa F09 = Fan prop. band in COOL mode

Heating diagram

Differentialtemperature control

Cool mode

Power

1st step

Pa C03 Pa C03

2nd step

Pa C05 Pa C05

Pa C03 Pa C03

3rd step

4th step

ST1/ST3

Page 25: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 25

Pa F10 = Fan cut-off deltaPa F11 = Cut-off hysteresis.Pa F13 = Maximum fan speed in COOL modePa F14 = Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in COOL modeAn example of interaction of these parameters is shown in the figure below:

Fan control in cool mode

In cooling mode only, if Pa F05= 0 (if the compressor is turned off the fan is off), parameter Pa F21 (preventilation timefor outdoor fan) is active.Before turning on the compressors in the circuit the fan must be turned on for an amount of time equal to Pa F25; fanspeed is proportionate to condensation temperature, but if the control requests cut-off during this time period the fan willrun at the minimum speed setting.

This parameter prevents the compressor from starting up with a condensation temperature that is too high.

CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL IN HEAT MODEPa F15 = Minimum fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F16 = Maximum silent fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F17 = Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in HEAT mode;Pa F18 = Fan prop. band in HEAT mode;Pa F10 = Fan cut-off delta;Pa F11 = Cut-off hysteresis;Pa F19 = Maximum fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F20 = Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in HEAT mode.An example of interaction of these parameters is shown in the figure below:

Fan control in heat mode

Fan control in coolmode: diagram

Heat mode

Fan control inheat mode:

diagram

Page 26: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 26

If circuit is in defrost mode, the fan is OFF.

The cut-off is bypassed for an amount of time equal to Pa F12 after the compressor is turned on. If the control requests cut-off during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.

The fan will always be off if: there is an alarm indicating that a condensation fan has shut down (refer to table of alarms).Energy 400 is on stand-by or off.

7.3.3 Combined or Separate CondensationParameter Pa F22 may be used to configure a dual circuit machine with a combined condenser.

Value0 1

Pa F22:condensation type

separate condensers combined condenser

If Pa F22 = 0 the two fans are independent and are controlled by condensation pressure/temperature and the status of thecompressors in the circuits.If Pa F22= 1 the outputs of the 2 fans are in parallel and will be controlled as follows:by the greater of the condensation probes in the circuits in cooling modeby the smaller of the condensation probes in the circuits in heating mode

If one of the 2 circuits does not have a condensation probe a configuration alarm will be generated (refer to table ofalarms).

7.3.4 Hydraulic pump controlIf the pump is configured for continuous operation (Pa P01 = 0) it will stay on at all times; if not (Pa P01 = 1) it will beturned on in response to a request from the regulation algorithm.

Interaction between the pump, the compressors and the regulation algorithm status is determined by the followingparameters:

• Pa P02: Delay between pump on and compressors on.• Pa P03: Delay between regulation algorithm off and pump off.

An example is provided in the diagram below:

Errore. Il collegamento non è valido.

During a defrost, when the compressor is off, the pump will stay on.

The pump will go off if:• There is a pump shut-down alarm, such as a flow switch alarm requiring manual reset (refer to table of alarms)

diagram

Reg. algorithm

Compressor

ON

OFF

Pump

ON

OFF

Time

TimeDelay between compressor offand pump offPa P03

Delay between pump onand compressor onPa P02

ON

OFFTime

Page 27: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 27

• The instrument is on stand-by or off (it goes off after the delay determined by Pa P03)

7.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater controlEnergy 400 can control 2 anti-freeze electrical heaters;Each electrical heater is controlled with its own set point, which is different for heating and cooling modes, by means ofthe following parameters :• Pa r07 : set point of electrical heater 1 in heating mode• Pa r08 : set point of electrical heater 1 in cooling mode• Pa r13 : set point of electrical heater 2 in heating mode• Pa r14 : set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling mode

The two set points of the anti-freeze electrical heaters fall within a maximum and a minimum value which the user may setin the form of the following parameters:• Pa r09 : maximum set point for anti-freeze electrical heater• Pa r10 : minimum set point for anti-freeze electrical heater

When off or on stand-by. control is based on the cooling set point and the control probe used in heating mode.

Parameter Pa R11 determines hysteresis around the set points for the anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters.

An example of operation is shown in the diagram below

Diagram illustrating anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters control

PARALLEL ELECTRICAL HEATERSParameter r12 enables the parallel electrical heaters function..

This function is useful if the system incorporates 2 hydraulic circuits, each with its own anti-freeze probe, and there is onlyone anti-freeze electrical heater.

The following conditions must apply for the function to be active:

• Pa r12 = 1• Pa r05 other than 0• Pa r06 other than 0.

Control is based on the minimum value detected by the 2 probes, using the set points of electrical heaters 1 (Pa r07 andPa r08)

If Pa r15= 1 the electrical heaters have a dual function, as anti-freeze electrical heaters and supplementary electricalheaters. If Pa r15 = 1 and the system is in heating mode., electrical heater 1 will start up under the command of its owncontrol or if ST1 <(SET HEATING-Pa r14) while heater 2 ) will start up if ST1 <(SET HEATING-Pa r15) . The control hysteresisis Pa C04 (heating control hysteresis).

7.3.6 Reversing valve controlThe reversing valves are turned off if Energy 400 is off or on stand-by;The valves are ON in cooling mode and OFF in heating and defrost modes.

diagram

Parallel electricalheaters

Supplementaryelectrical heaters

Page 28: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 28

8 FUNCTIONSx

8.1 Recording hours of operation

The devices stores the number of hours of operation of the following in permanent memory:• hydraulic pump• compressors.

It is precise to within one minute.Hours of operation may be displayed by entering the appropriate menu with the label Ohr (refer to menu structure).The whole value is displayed if it is less than 999 hours; if it exceeds this value, the hundreds of hours will be shown andthe decimal point will appear:For example, 1234 hours will be displayed as follows:

To set the number of hours to zero, hold the DOWN key (refer to keys) down for two seconds while displaying the numberof hours of operation.

In the event of a power failure, the latest fraction of an hour recorded is set to 0, so that duration is rounded down:

8.2 Defrost

The defrost function is active in heating mode only.It is used to prevent ice formation on the surface of the external exchanger, which can occur in locations with lowtemperatures and high humidity and will considerably reduce the machine’s thermodynamic performance, creating a riskof damage to the machine.

Defrost start and end depends on the condensation probe values (refer to condensation probes– defrost) and the settingsof the parameters listed below:

8.2.1 Defrost startThe defrost starts as a result of three parameters:• Pa d02 : temperature/pressure at which defrost starts• Pa d03 : defrost interval

When the probe detects temperature/pressure values below the value of parameter Pa d02 it starts the timer, and whenthe number of minutes determined by parameter Pa d03 has expired the defrost will start;

The timer will stop if:• Temperature/pressure rises above the value of parameter Pa d02• The compressor is turned offThe timer will be set to zero if:• a defrost cycle is completed• “Energy 400” is turned off• operating mode is changed (refer to operating modes)• temperature rises above the value of parameter Pa d04 (defrost end temperature/pressure)

During the defrost the compressors are handled as follows:• combined defrost: all compressors are turned on at full power;• separate defrost: all compressors in the circuit being defrosted are turned on at full power;there may be a delay between compressor coming on and Defrost start imposed by parameter Pa d11

Defrost will take place only if the following conditions are met: :• The safety timing of compressors in the circuit must be 0• The delay between circuit defrosts must have expired since the last circuit defrost (Pa d08)

On a dual circuit machine with combined defrost, the following condition must apply:• in the circuit for which defrost start is not requested, compressor safety time = 0 (refer to safety timing) so that the

two circuits may both start a defrost at the same time.

If at the time of defrost start the compressor-4-way valve delay time Pa d06 = 0, the compressor will stay on; if not, theadjustment shown in the diagram below will be carried out.

Stopping timer

Setting timer tozero

Defrost:compressor

management

MEMORY

35.48

MEMORY

35

Power failure

Page 29: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 29

8.2.2 Control during defrostDuring the defrost cycle loads are controlled as described below:

compressors in the circuit for which defrost is underway will be turned on to full power, if not already on at full power

The reversing valve in the circuit for which defrost is underway will behave the way it does in the summer cycle.When the valve is reversed, a timer begins counting the minimum by-pass time for the circuit involved, equal to “minimumby-pass time during cooling” (Pa A01).

If the condensation pressure detected falls below (Pa F23 — Pa F24), the fan will be OFF; if it exceeds Pa F23, the fan will beON. At the end of the drip stage, if parameter Pa D07 is not 0 the fans will operate at full speed for an amount of timeequal to Pa F25 in order to remove water from the batteries as quickly as possible.If there are no pressure probes on the machine, this will be applied to temperature.

8.2.3 Defrost endDefrost end may be determined by temperature/pressure values read by analogue probes ST3, ST2, ST6 (analogue inputs)or by digital input (digital inputs).

The configuration parameters are:• Pa d09 : Circuit 1 defrost end probe• Pa d10: Circuit 2 defrost end probe

Possible values and meanings of these parameters are shown below:

ValueParameters

Description

0 defrost end in response to digital input1 defrost end in response to ST32 defrost end in response to ST43 defrost end in response to ST6

If Pa d09=0 (defrost end in response to digital input) the digital input configured as “End of defrost circuit 1” (digitalinputs) will be taken into consideration; if Pa d10=0 input “circuit 2 defrost end”(digital inputs) .In this configuration, as soon as the input becomes active the circuit will have a defrost end.

If an analogue input is selected for defrost end, the defrost will end will pressure/temperature rises above the value ofparameter Pa d04 (defrost end temperature/pressure).

If the input is not configured, defrost will end only when pressure/temperature rises above the maximum duration set byparameter Pa d05

Defrost will always end if duration exceeds the maximum duration set by parameter Pa D05.

After defrost end, if drip time Pa d07= 0 the compressors will stay on; if not, the adjustment shown in the figure below willtake place:

diagram

Compressors

Reversing valve

Fans

Parameterconfiguration

Drip time

Page 30: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 30

diagram

Page 31: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 31

9 PARAMETERSx

Parameters make the ” Energy 400” a fully configurable device.They may be modified through:• instrument keyboard• Personal computer (with a suitable connection and “Param manager” software)

We will now take a detailed look at all the parameters, divided by category.

9.1 Description of Parameters

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS:Determine the features of the machine.

If one or more of the parameters in this category are modified, the cotnroller must be switched off after the modificationand switched on again to ensure correct operation.

Maximum set point during “heating”Upper limit on set point in “heating” modeMinimum set point during “heating”Lower limit on set point in “heating” modeMaximum set point during “cooling”Upper limit on set point in “cooling” modeMinimum set point during “cooling”Lower limit on set point in “cooling” modeNumber of circuits on machine (∗∗ )Number of cooling circuits0= not permitted1= 1 cooling circuit2= 2 cooling circuitsNumber of compressors per circuit (∗∗ )0= no compressors1= 1 compressor2= 2 compressors3= 3 compressors4= 4 compressorsNumber of capacity steps per compressor (∗∗ )0= no capacity steps1= 1 capacity step per compressor2= 2 capacity steps per compressor3= 3 capacity steps per compressorCompressor on sequence0= depending on hours of operation1= unvaried on sequence Compressor selection algorithm0= circuit saturation1= circuit balancing ST1 configurationUsed to configure analogue input ST10= No probe1= Inflowing air/water analogue input2= Heating request digital input3= Regulation algorithm request digital input4= NTC differential input ST2 configuration0= No probe1= Circuit 1 outflowing water/antifreeze/inlet air analogue input2= Cooling request digital input ST3 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= 4…20 mA condensation input3= 4…20 mA dynamic set point input4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 15= Regulation algorithm input in “heating” mode for water-water machines with manual reversal ST4 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= Multifunctional digital input3= Outdoor temperature analogue input ST5 configuration0= No probe1= Outflowing water/anti-freeze/inlet air analogue input, circuit 2 ST6 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= 4…20 mA condensation input

∗ non sono ammesse configurazioni macchina con numero di gradini superiore a 4

Pa H01

Pa H02

Pa H03

Pa H04

Pa H05

Pa H06

Pa H07

Pa H08

Pa H09

Pa H11

Pa H12

Pa H13

Pa H14

Pa H15

Pa H16

Page 32: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 32

3= Not permitted4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 2 Bottom of scale pressure valuePressure value corresponding to an analogue input value (ST3 or ST6) on the 20mA input (if configured as a current input).Example if using a pressure transducer with limits of 0-30.0 bar/4-20mA, set PaH17=300 Polarity of digital inputs ID1,ID2,ID3,ID4 Polarity of digital inputs ID5,ID6,ID7,ID8 Polarity of digital inputs ID9,ID10,ID11,ST4 Polarity of digital inputs ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15These parameters may be used to select the polarity which will activate the digital inputs to suit them to various operatingrequirements. Refer to Digital inputs: polarity when setting input polarity. Configuration of digital input ID1 Configuration of digital input ID2 Configuration of digital input ID3 Configuration of digital input ID4 Configuration of digital input ID5 Configuration of digital input ID6 Configuration of digital input ID7 Configuration of digital input ID8 Configuration of digital input ID9 Configuration of digital input ID10 Configuration of digital input ID11 Configuration of digital input ST4 if configured as digital

0 Input disabled 12 Low pressure circuit 11 Flow switch 13 Low pressure circuit 22 Remote OFF 14 High pressure compressor 13 Remote Heat/Cool 15 High pressure compressor 24 Thermal switch compressor 1 16 High pressure compressor 35 Thermal switch compressor 2 17 High pressure compressor 46 Thermal switch compressor 3 18 Defrost end circuit 17 Thermal switch compressor 4 19 Defrost end circuit 28 Thermal switch fan circuit 1 20 Request for power step 29 Thermal switch fan circuit 2 21 Request for power step 310 High pressure circuit 1 22 Request for power step 411 High pressure circuit 2

Configuration of output RL2 Configuration of output RL3 Configuration of output RL4 Configuration of output RL5 Configuration of output RL6 Configuration of output RL7These parameters are used to assign various functions to relays as required by the type of application.0= Not in use1= Reversing valve circuit 12= Reversing valve circuit 23= Condensation fan circuit 14= Condensation fan circuit 25= Electrical heater 16= Electrical heater 27= Hydraulic pump8= Evaporator fan9= Power Step 210= Power Step 311= Power Step 4 Polarity of output RL2 Polarity of output RL3 Polarity of output RL4 Polarity of output RL5 Polarity of output RL8Relay polarity may be set for the corresponding outputs.0=relay on if output active1=relay off if output not active Configuration of analogue output 1 (AN1 or TK1) Configuration of analogue output 2 (AN2 or TK2)Condensation fan control outputs are available with 2 types of signal.0= Suignal for phase cut fan control1= 4-20mA output Not in use Selection of operating mode0= Selection from keyboard1= Selection from digital input Enable dynamic set pointIf enabled, this function permits automatic variation of the working set point depending on outdoor temperature or on a4-20mA analogue input. The parameter has no meaning if PaH13≠3 or PaH14≠3.0= Function disabled1= Function enabled Maximum dynamic set point offset in cooling mode

Pa H17

Pa H18Pa H19Pa H20Pa H21

Pa H23Pa H24Pa H25Pa H26Pa H27Pa H28Pa H29Pa H30Pa H31Pa H32Pa H33Pa H34

Pa H35Pa H36Pa H37Pa H38Pa H39Pa H40

Pa H41Pa H42Pa H43Pa H44Pa H45

Pa H46Pa H47

Pa H48Pa H49

Pa H50

Pa H51

Page 33: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 33

The maximum value that may be added to the set point in cooling mode (COO) when the DYNAMIC SET POINT function isenabled. Maximum dynamic set point offset in heating modeThe maximum value that may be added to the set point in heating mode (HEA) when the DYNAMIC SET POINT function isenabled. Outdoor temperature set point in cooling modeThe outdoor temperature value on the basis of which …The parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature set point in heating modeThe parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature differential in cooling modeThe parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature differential in heating modeThe parameter is significant only if the set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Offset ST1, Offset ST2, Offset ST3These parameters may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature or pressure reading andthe actual temperature or pressure. Offset ST4 Offset ST5These parameters may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature reading and the actualtemperature. Offset ST6This parameter may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature (or pressure) reading andthe actual temperture or pressure. Mains frequencyMains frequency 50 HzMains frequency 60 Hz Selection °C or °F0= degrees °C1= degrees °F Family serial address, Device serial addressThese parameters may be used to address the device when connected to a personal computer or supervision system.Normally both are 0. User passwordMay be used to enter a password for access to level two parameters, and to copy parameters from the instrument to thecopy card. Copy card write passwordThe password that must be entered to copy parameters to the copy card. Presence of keyboard

ALARM PARAMETERS:

Low pressure pressure switch by-pass time.Determines the delay between starting up the compressor and starting up the low pressure digital alarm diagnostics.Expressed in seconds. Low pressure alarm events per hourUsed to set the number of low pressure digital alarm events per hour beyond which the system will switch from automaticreset to manual reset. Bypass pump activation flow switchDetermines the delay between activation of the hydraulic pump and activation of the flow switch alarm diagnostics.Expressed in seconds. Duration of active flow switch inputMay be used to set the amount of time for which the flow switch digital input must remain active to generate a flowswitch alarm. The timer starts after the flow switch by-pass time. Expressed in seconds. Duration of inactive flow switch inputMay be used to set the time for which the flow switch digital input must remain inactive to be included in thecorresponding alarm. Expressed in seconds. Number of flow switch alarms/hourMay be used to set the number of flow switch digital alarms per hour after which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset . When this occurs, the hydraulic pump is deactivated. By-pass compressor thermal switch following compressor onDetermines the delay between compressor activation and activation of the compressor thermal switch digital diagnosticsalarm. Expressed in seconds.Compressor thermal switch alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of compressor thermal switch alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm is switchedfrom automatic to manual reset.Number of fan thermal switch events per hourMay be used to set a number of fan thermal events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset .Anti-freeze alarm by-passDetermines the delay between turning on the machine (selection of an operating mode or switch from OFF->ON) andactivation of the compressor thermal switch digital alarm diagnostics. Expressed in seconds.Anti-freeze alarm set point

Pa H52

Pa H53

Pa H54

Pa H55

Pa H56

Pa H57Pa H58Pa H59

Pa H60Pa H61

Pa H62

Pa H63

Pa H64

Pa H65Pa H66

Pa H67

Pa H68

Pa H68

Pa A01

Pa A02

Pa A03

Pa A04

Pa A05

Pa A06

Pa A07

Pa A08

Pa A09

Pa A10

Pa A11

Page 34: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 34

May be used to set the temperature below which the anti-freeze alarm is triggered.Anti-freeze alarm hysteresisMay be used to set the differential value of the anti-freeze alarm.Anti-freeze alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of anti-freeze alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset .Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation set pointMay be used to set a condensation pressure/temperature value beyond which the high pressure alarm will be triggered.Analogue input high pressure/temperature hysteresisMay be used to set the differential for the analogue high pressure alarm.Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation bypassDetermines the delay after turning on of the first compressor in the cooling circuit and activation of the correspondinganalogue input low pressure/temperature analogue alarm diagnostics.Analogue input low pressure/temperature activation set pointMay be used to set a temperature/pressure value below which the low pressure alarm will be triggered.Analogue input low pressure/temperature hysteresisMay be used to set the differential for the analogue low pressure/temperature alarm.Number of analogue input low pressure alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of low pressure analogue alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm will be switchedfrom automatic to manual reset.Machine out of coolant differentialIf the difference between the absolute value of the set point and of the control probe exceeds this parameter, the machineout of coolant timer will start.Bypass machine out of coolantDetermines the delay between the turning on of the first compressor in the corresponding cooling circuit and activation ofthe machine out of coolant alarm diagnostics. Expressed in minutes.Duration of machine out of coolantDetermines the duration of the condition described under parameter A20 beyond which the machine out of coolant alarmwill be triggered.Machine out of coolant alarm triggeredEnables machine out of coolant alarm diagnostics0= diagnostics disabled1= diagnostics enabled Enable low pressure alarm during defrostingEnables the minimum alarm during defrosting.0= Low pressure alarm diagnostics disabled during defrosting1= Low pressure alarm diagnostics enabled during defrosting Input over-temperature set pointTemperature value ST1 above which the high temperature alarm E46 is triggered. Input over-temperature durationDetermines the duration of the condition described for parameter A25 beyond which the input over-temperature alarm istriggered.

COMPRESSOR PARAMETERS

OFF-ON safety timeThe minimum amount of time that must pass between turning off the compressor and turning it on again. Expressed intens of seconds.ON-ON safety timeThe minimum amount of time that must pass between turning the compressor on and turning it on again. Expressed intens of seconds.Hysteresis regulation algorithm during coolingMay be used to select intervention differential in cooling mode.Hysteresis regulation algorithm during heatingMay be used to select intervention differential in heating mode. Regulation algorithm step intervention differentialMay be used to set a temperature differential in relation to the set point beyond which the second step is activated. Compressor on intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning on of two compressors. Compressor off intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning off of two compressors. Capacity step on intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning on of compressor and of capacity steps.

FAN CONTROL PARAMETERS:

Fan output configuration0 = proportional fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on parameters)1 = fan output “on-off”; in this mode the regulation algorithm performs the same calculation as in proportional fanoutput, but if the result is greater than 0, regulation algorithmoutput will be 100.2 = on-off operation in response to request from compressor. In this mode output is 0 if no compressor in the circuit ison, or 100% if at least one compressor in the circuit is on.Fan pick-up timeTime for which fan runs at maximum speed after starting up. Expressed in seconds/10.Fan phase shiftThis parameter may be used to calibrate fan control output in proportion to the type of fan in use, adjusting it to suit thefan’s typical current/voltage phase shift.Impulse duration of triac onMay be used to vary the length of the impulse from the triac command.Functioning in resposne to compressor request

Pa A12

Pa A13

Pa A14

Pa A15

Pa A16

Pa A17

Pa A18

Pa A19

Pa A20

Pa A21

Pa A22

Pa A23

Pa A24

Pa A25

Pa A26

Pa C01

Pa C02

Pa C03

Pa C04

Pa C05

Pa C06

Pa C07

Pa C08

Pa F01

Pa F02

Pa F03

Pa F04

Pa F05

Page 35: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 35

0= if compressor is off, fan is off1= condensation control independent of compressorMinimum speed during coolingMinimum value of proportional fan control during cooling. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Maximum silent speed during coolingMaximum value of proportional fan control during cooling. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during coolingCondensation pressure/temperature value below which the fan runs at minimum cooling speed.Proportional band during coolingTemperature/pressure differential corresponding to change from minimum to silent maximum fan speed during cooling(F07).Fan cut-off differentialCondensation temperature/pressure differential in relation to temperature/pressure set point (F08 or F14) beyond whichfan is cut off.Cut-off hysteresis.Condensation temperature/pressure differential for cut-off.Cut-off bypass timeDetermines the amount of time after fan start-up during which fan cut-off is excluded. Expressed in seconds.Maximum speed during coolingMay be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value in cooling mode.Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure during coolingCondensation pressure/temperature value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F13.Minimum speed during heatingMinimum proportional fan control value in heating mode. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Maximum silent speed during heatingMaximum value of proportional fan control during heating. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during heatingCondensation temperature/pressure value above which the fan operates at minimum heating speed.Proportional band during heatingTemperature/pressure differential corresponding to a change from minimum to maximum silent fan speed during heating(F16).Maximum speed during heatingMay be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value during heating.Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during heatingCondensation temperature/pressure value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F19.Preventilation in cooling modeMay be used to set a preventilation time in cooling mode before compressor combines on in order to prevent.…Combined or separate fan controlParameter F22 may be used to configure dual circuit machines with a single condenser.Parameter F22 condensation type0= separate condensers1= combined condenser.If Pa F22 = 0 the fans are independent and depend on condensation pressure/temperature and the status of thecompressors in the circuits. If Pa F22= 1 the outputs of the 2 fans are parallel and they are controlled:on the basis of the greater of the two circuit condensation probes in cooling modeon the basis of the smaller of the two circuit condensation probes in heating modeIf there is no condensation probe in one of the 2 circuits, a configuration alarm will be generated. Fan activation temperature/pressure set point during defrostingDuring defrosting, if temperature/pressure exceeds the “fan activation during defrosting” threshold (Pa F23) the fans willcome on at full power.Fan activation hysteresis during defrostingCondensation temperature/pressure differential for fan control during defrosting.

PUMP PARAMETERS

Pump operating modeMay be used to determine pump operating mode:0=continuous operation1=operation in response to a request from the regulation algorithmDelay between pump ON and compressor ONMay be used to set a delay between starting a pump and starting a compressor, expressed in seconds.Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFFMay be used to set a delay between turning off a compressor and turning off a pump, expressed in seconds.

ANTI-FREEZE/BOILER PARAMETERS

Configuration of electrical heaters in defrost modeDetermines electrical heater operation during defrosting0=come on only in response to a request from the regulation algorithm1=always on during defrostingConfiguration of electrical heaters on in cooling modeDetermines electrical heater operation in cooling mode0=off during cooling1=on during cooling (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)Configuration of electrical heaters on in heating modeDetermines electrical heater operation in heating mode

Pa F06

Pa F07

Pa F08

Pa F09

Pa F10

Pa F11

Pa F12

Pa F13

Pa F14

Pa F15

Pa F16

Pa F17

Pa F18

Pa F19

Pa F20

Pa F21

Pa F22

Pa F23

Pa F24

Pa P01

Pa P02

Pa P03

Pa r01

Pa r02

Pa r03

Page 36: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 36

0=off during heating1= on during cooling (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probeConfiguration of electrical heater 2 control probeDetermines the control probes belonging to electrical heaters in heating mode0= Not present1=Control probe ST12=Control probe ST23= Control probe ST5Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on stand-byDetermines the status of electrical heaters when the instrument is OFF or on stand-by0=Always off when OFF or on stand-by1=On when OFF or on stand-by (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm)Set point of anti-freeze electrial heater 1 in heating modeTemperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in heating mode.Set point of anti-freeze electrical heater 1 in cooling modeTemperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in cooling mode.Maximum set point of anti-freeze electrical heatersDetermines the maximum setting of the anti-freeze electrical heater set points.Minimum set point of anti-freeze electrical heatersDetermines the minimumsetting of the anti-freeze electrcial heater set points.Anti-freeze heater hysteresisAnti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm hysteresis.Set point of external anti-freeze electrical heatersTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters in the secondary circuit come on.Set point of electrical heater 2 in heating modeTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in heating mode.Set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling modeTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in cooling mode.Enable supplementary electrical heaters

DEFROST PARAMETERS::

Defrost enabled0= defrost function enabled1= defrost function disabledDefrost start temperature / pressureTemperature/pressure below which the defrost cycle is started.Defrost interval (response time)Duration for which probe remains below defrost start temperature/pressure, expressed in minutes.Defrost end temperature/pressureTemperature/pressure above which defrost ends.Maximum defrost time (time-out)Maximum duration of defrost in minutes.Compressor-reversing valve wait time (anti-bleeding)Wait time between compressor going off and reversal of the 4-way valve at the beginning of the defrost cycle.Drip timeWait time at the end of the defrost cycle between the compressor going off and the reversal of the 4-way valve. Temperature at which defrost starts if Pa H49= 1Temperature below which the defrost cycle is started. Temperature at which defrost ends if Pa H49=1Temperature above which the defrost cycle is ended.

9.2 Parameters table

All ”Energy 400” parameters are listed in the table below.

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS *Par. Description Value Limits Unit of meas.

Pa H01 Maximum set point during heating H02 ÷ 90.0 °CPa H02 Minimum set point during heating -40.0 ÷ H01 °CPa H03 Maximum set point during cooling H04 ÷ 90.0 °CPa H04 Minimum set point during cooling -40.0 ÷ H03 °CPa H05 Number of circuits on machine 0 ÷ 2 NumPa H06 Number of compressors per circuit 0 ÷ 4 NumPa H07 Number of capacity steps per compressor 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H08 Compressors on sequence 0÷1 FlagPa H09 Circuit balancing 0÷1 FlagPa H10 Presence of heat pump 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H11 Configuration ST1 0 ÷ 4 NumPa H12 Configuration ST2 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H13 Configuration ST3 0 ÷ 5 NumPa H14 Configuration ST4 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H15 Configuration ST5 0 ÷ 5 NumPa H16 Configuration ST6 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H17 Bottom of scale pressure value 0-350 KPa*10Pa H18 Polarity ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H19 Polarity ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8 0 ÷ 1 Flag

Pa r04Pa r05

Pa r06

Pa r07

Pa r08

Pa r09

Pa r10

Pa r11

Pa r12

Pa r13

Pa r14

Pa r15

Pa d01

Pa d02

Pa d03

Pa d04

Pa d05

Pa d06

Pa d07

Pa d08

Pa d09

Configurationparameters

Page 37: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 37

Pa H20 Polarity ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H21 Polarity ST1 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H22 Polarity ST2 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H23 Configuration ID1 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H24 Configuration ID2 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H25 Configuration ID3 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H26 Configuration ID4 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H27 Configuration ID5 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H28 Configuration ID6 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H29 Configuration ID7 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H30 Configuration ID8 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H31 Configuration ID9 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H32 Configuration ID10 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H33 Configuration ID11 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H34 Configuration ST4 if digital input 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H35 Configuration relay 2 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H36 Configuration relay 3 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H37 Configuration relay 4 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H38 Configuration relay 5 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H39 Configuration relay 6 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H40 Configuration relay 7 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H41 Polarity RL2 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H42 Polarity RL3 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H43 Polarity RL4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H44 Polarity RL5 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H45 Alarm relay polarity 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H46 Configuration fan 1 output 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H47 Configuration fan 2 output 0 ÷ 2 NumPa H48 Free 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H49 Selection of operating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H50 Enable dynamic set point 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H51 Offset of dynamic set point during cooling -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H52 Offset of dynamic set point during heating -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H53 Dynamic outdoor temp. set point during cooling 0 ÷ 255 °CPa H54 Dynamic outdoor temp. set point during heating 0 ÷ 255 °CPa H55 Delta dynamic outdoor temp. set point during cooling -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H56 Delta dynamic outdoor temp. set point during heating -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H57 Offset ST1 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H58 Offset ST2 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H59 Offset ST3 -127 ÷ 127 °C/10-Kpa*10Pa H60 Offset ST4 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H61 Offset ST5 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H62 Offset ST6 -127 ÷ 127 °C/10-Kpa*10Pa H63 0=50 Hz 1=60 Hz 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H64 0= °C 1=°F FlagPa H65 Family serial address 0 ÷ 14 Num.Pa H66 Device serial address 0 ÷ 14 Num.Pa H67 User password 0 ÷ 255 Num.Pa H68 Copy card password 0 ÷ 255 Num.

* If parameters in this category are modified, the controller must be turned off and on again to ensure correctfunctioning.

ALARM PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa A01 Low pressure switch bypass time after compressor on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A02 Low pressure alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A03 Flow switch bypass time after pump on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A04 Duration of active flow switch input 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A05 Duration of inactive flow switch input 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A06 Number of flow switch alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A07 Bypass compressor thermal switch from compressor on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A08 Number of compressors 1 + 2 thermal switch alarms/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A09 Number of fan thermal switch alarm events/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A10 Anti-freeze alarm bypass after ON-OFF 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A11 Anti-freeze alarm activation set point -127 ÷ 127 °CPa A12 Hysteresis of anti-freeze alarm 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa A13 Anti-freeze alarm events/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A14 Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation set

point0 ÷ 900 °C/10 – Kpa*10

Pa A15 Analogue input high pressure hysteresis 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A16 Analogue input low pressure activation bypass 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A17 Analogue input low pressure activation set point -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A18 Analogue input low pressure hysteresis 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A19 Analogue input low pressure alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 Num

Alarm parameters

Page 38: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 38

Pa A20 Machine out of coolant differential 0 ÷ 255 °CPa A21 Machine out of coolant bypass 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A22 Machine out of coolant duration 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A23 Machine out of coolant alarm triggered 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa A24 Enable low pressure alarm during defrost 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa A25 Input over-temperature set point 0 ÷ 255 °CPa A26 Input over-temperature duration 0 ÷ 255 S*10

COMPRESSOR PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa C01 ON-OFF safety time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa C02 ON-ON safety time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa C03 Hysteresis regulation algorithm during cooling 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa C04 Hysteresis regulation algorithm during heating 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa C05 Regulation algorithm step intervention deltaPa C06 Compressor – compressor on interval 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa C07 Compressor – compressor off interval 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa C08 Capacity step on interval 0 ÷ 255 Seconds

FAN CONTROL PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa F01 Fan output mode 0 ÷ 2 Num.Pa F02 Fan pick-up time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds/10Pa F03 Fan phase shift 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F04 Impulse duration of triak on 0 ÷ 255 uS*100Pa F05 Functioning in response to compressor request 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa F06 Minimum speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F07 Maximum silent speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F08 Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during

cooling-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F09 Prop. band during cooling 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F10 Delta cut-off 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F11 Cut-off hysteresis. 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F12 Bypass time cut-off 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa F13 Max speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F14 Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during

cooling-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F15 Minimum speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F16 Maximum silent speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F17 Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during

heating-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F18 Prop. band during heating 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F19 Maximum fan speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F20 Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during

heating-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F21 Preventilation in cooling mode 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa F22 Combined or separate fan control 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa F23 Fan activation temperature/pressure set point during

defrosting-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10

Pa F24 Fan activation hysteresis during defrosting 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F25 Preventilation after defrosting 0 ÷ 255 Seconds

PUMP PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa P01 Pump operating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa P02 Delay between pump ON and compressor ON 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa P03 Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFF 0 ÷ 255 Seconds

ELECTRICAL HEATER PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa r01 Configuration of electrical heaters in defrost mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa R02 Configuration of electrical heaters on in cooling mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r03 Configuration of electrical heaters on in heating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r04 Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probe 0 ÷ 6 NumPa r05 Configuration of electrical heater 2 control probe 0 ÷ 6 NumPa r06 Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on STAND-BY 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r07 Set point of electrical heater 1 in heating mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r08 Set point of electrical heater 1 in cooling mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r09 Max. set point electrical heaters P r10 ÷ 127 °CPa r10 Min. set point electrical heaters -127 ÷ P r09 °CPa r11 hysteresis of anti-freeze heaters 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa R12 Set point of external anti-freeze electrical heaters Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r13 Set point of electrical heater 2 in heating mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r14 Set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °C

Compressorparameters

Fan controlparameters

Pump parameters

Electrical heaterparameters

Page 39: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 39

Pa r15 Enable supplementary electrical heaters 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r16 Delta of activation of supplementary heater 1 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa r17 Delta of activation of supplementary heater 2 0 ÷ 25.5 °C

DEFROST PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa d01 Defrost enabled 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa d02 Defrost start temperature/pressure -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa d03 Defrost interval 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa d04 Defrost end temperature/pressure -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa d05 Maximum defrost time 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa d06 Compressor-reversing valve wait time 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa d07 Drip time 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa d08 Delay between defrosting of circuits 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa d09 Output probe defrost circuit 1 0 ÷ 8 NumPa d10 Output probe defrost circuit 2 0 ÷ 8 NumPa d11 Delay in compressors on in defrost mode 0 ÷ 255 Seconds

EXTENSION PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of

measurementPa N01 Polarity of ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa N02 Configuration ID12 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N03 Configuration ID13 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N04 Configuration ID14 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N05 Configuration ID15 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N06 Configuration relay 9 0 ÷ 11 NumPa N07 Configuration relay 10 0 ÷ 11 Num

Defrostparameters

Extensionparameters

Page 40: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 40

10 DIAGNOSTICSx

“Energy 400” can perform full systems diagnostics and signal a series of alarms.Alarm trigger and reset modes are set using parameters Pa A01 – Pa A26.For some alarms the signal will not be given for a certain amount of time, determined by a parameter.For some alarms the number of alarm events is counted; if the number of alarm events in the past hour exceeds a certainthreshold set by a parameter, the alarm will switch from automatic to manual reset.Alarms are sampled every 113 seconds;Example: if the number of events/hour is set to 3, the duration of an alarm must fall between 2*113 seconds and 3*113seconds for the alarm to be switched from automatic to manual reset.

If an alarm is triggered more than once within one sampling period (113 seconds), only one alarm will be counted.

Alarms with manual reset are reset by pressing the ON-OFF button and releasing

Manual reset shuts down corresponding loads and requires an operator to intervene (reset the alarm using the ON-OFFcontrol).Manual reset alarms are used mainly to identify problems which could result in damage to the system

10.1 List of alarms

When an alarm is triggered, two things occur:• The corresponding loads are shut down• The alarm appears on the keyboard display

The alarm message consists of a code with the format “Enn” (where nn is a 2-digit number identifying the type of alarm,such as: E00, E25, E39….).All possible alarms are listed in the table below, along with their codes and the corresponding loads that will be shutdown:

Alarms

Alarm events perhour

Time225 s 225 s 225 s 225 s

1 2 3Counter

Alarm

Automatic reset Manual reset

Alarm sampling

Page 41: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 41

LOADS SHUT DOWNCODE MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONCOMP.1 COMP.2 COMP.3 COMP.4 FAN1 FAN2 PUMP RES.1 RES.2

E00 Remote off • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Remote OFF”

(refer to digital inputs)

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E01 High pressure circuit 1 • Compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

circuit 1” (refer to digital inputs)

YES YES1 YES1 YES1

E02 Low pressure circuit 1 • Compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down; also condenserfans if condensation is separate for the 2 circuits (refer tocombined or separate condensation);

• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressurecircuit 1” (refer to digital inputs);

• Automatically reset unless alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A02, after which manually reset;

• Inactive during timer Pa A01 after compressor on or reversalof 4-way valve (reversing valve) in circuit 1

YES YES1 YES1 YES1 YES YES2

E03 Thermal switchprotection compressor 1

• Compressor 1 will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch

compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the

value of parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.

YES

E04 Thermal switchprotection condenserfan circuit 1

• Fans and compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down; if the 2circuits are set up for combined condensation, (refer tocombined or separate condensation) compressors in circuit 2will also be shut down;

• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switchfan circuit 1” (refer to digital inputs);

• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A09, after which manually reset;

YES YES1 YES1 —

YES2YES1 —

YES2YES YES2

E05 Anti-freeze circuit 1 • Fans and compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST2 (refer to analogue inputs) is

configured as anti-freeze probe (Pa H12 = 1);• Triggered when probe ST2 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Turned off if probe ST2 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +

Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the

value of parameter Pa A13,after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on

with the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or from the digitalinput ON-OFF (refer to digital inputs) or when heating modeis started.

YES YES1 YES1 YES1 YES YES2

E06 Probe ST2 fault • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered if probe ST2, configured as an analogue input,

shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E07 Probe ST3 fault • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered if probe ST3, configured as an analogue input,

shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

Tabella Allarmi

Page 42: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 42

E08 External circuit 1 anti-freeze

• Fans and compressors will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST3 (refer to analogue inputs) is

configured as an external anti-freeze probe (Pa H13 = 4);• Active when probe ST3 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Goes off if probe ST3 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +

Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value

of parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on

using the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or ON-OFF digitalinput (refer to digital inputs) or heating mode is switched on.

YES YES YES YES YES YES

E09 High pressurecompressor 1

Compressor 1 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset

YES

E13 Thermal switchprotection compressor 2

Compressor 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch

compressor 2” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value of

parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor is turned on.

YES

E19 High pressurecompressor 2

Compressor 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset

YES

E21 High pressure circuit 2 Compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

circuit 2” (refer to digital inputs)

YES YES

E22 Low pressure circuit 2 Compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down, as well as condenserfans if the 2 circuits have separate condensation (refer tocombined or separate condensation);

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressurecircuit 2” (refer to digital inputs);

Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A02, after which manually reset;

Inactive during timer Pa A01 after compressor on or reversal of4-way valve (reversing valve) of circuit 1

YES YES YES YES2

E23 Thermal switchprotection compressor 3

Compressor 3 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch

compressor 3” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach value of

parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.

YES

E24 Thermal switchprotection condenserfan circuit 2

Fans and compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down; if the 2 circuitshave combined condensation (refer to combined or separatecondensation) the compressors in circuit 1 will also be shutdown;

Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch circuit2 fan” (refer to digital inputs);

Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches value ofparameter Pa A09, after which manually reset;

YES2 YES2 YES YES YES2 YES

Anti-freeze circuit 2 Fans and compressors will be shut down; YES YES YES2 YES

Page 43: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 43

Active if analogue probe ST5 (refer to analogue inputs) isconfigured as anti-freeze probe (Pa H15 = 1);

Triggered when probe ST5 detects a value below Pa A11;Turns off when probe ST5 detects a value above Pa A11 + Pa

A12;Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches value of

parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A10 after turning on Energy 400 using

On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or digital input ON-OFF(refer to digital inputs) or start of heating mode.

E26 Probe ST5 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST5, configured as an analogue input, shorts

or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E27 Probe ST6 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST6, configured as an analogue input, shorts

or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E08 External circuit 2 anti-freeze

• Fans and compressors will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST6 (refer to analogue inputs) is

configured as an external anti-freeze probe (Pa H13 = 4);• Active when probe ST6 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Goes off if probe ST6 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +

Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value

of parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on

using the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or ON-OFF digitalinput (refer to digital inputs) or heating mode is switched on.

YES YES YES YES YES YES

E29 High pressurecompressor 3

Compressor 3 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

compressor 3” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset

YES

E33 Thermal switchprotection compressor 4

Compressor 4 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch

compressor 4” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the value of

parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.

YES

E39 High pressurecompressor 4

Compressor 4 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure

compressor 4” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset

YES

E40 Probe ST1 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST1, configured as an analogue input, shorts

or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E41 Flow switch All compressors, fans and pump will be cut off if manuallyreset;

Triggered if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (referto digital inputs) remains active for an amount of timeequal to Pa A04;

Goes off if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (referto digital inputs) remains inactive for an amount of timeequal to Pa A05;

YES YES YES YES YES YES SI3

Page 44: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 44

Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A06 , after which manually reset;

Inactive during timer Pa A03 following pump on.E42 Probe ST4 fault All loads will be shut down;

Triggered if probe ST4, configured as an analogue input,shorts, is cut off, or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E45 Configuration error All loads will be shut down;Triggered if at least one of the following conditions apply:H11= 2 (ST1 configured as request for heating), H12= 2 (ST2

configured as request for cooling) and both inputs areactive.

Sum of compressors and capacity steps on machine exceeds 4The keyboard is declared present (Pa H69=1) and there is no

communication between the keyboard and the basic unit.

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

E46 All loads will be shut down except the pump;Triggered if probe ST1 (refer to analogue inputs) has a value

exceeding Pa A25 for an amount of time exceeding Pa 26in cooling mode;

Goes off if probe ST1 (refer to analogue inputs) has a valuelower than Pa A25 – Pa A12;

Automatically reset.

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

1 If it belongs to circuit 12 If combined condensation system3 Only if manual reset e

outputs defined as capacity steps will go off if there is an alarm for the compressor to which they belong

Page 45: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 45

The tables below list alarms by type (digital or analogue).

TABLE OF DIGITAL ALARMS:

Alarm name Bypass trigger event Bypass time Triggerduration

Deactivationduration

N. alarmevents/hour

Compressor 1,2,3,4 highpressure alarm

None absent absent absent Manual reset

High pressure circuitalarm

None absent absent absent Manual reset

Low pressure alarm A compressor comingon in the circuit orreversal of 4-wayvalve

Pa A01 absent absent Pa A02

Flow switch alarm Pump coming on Pa A03 Pa A04 Pa A05 Pa A06Compressor 1,2,3,4thermal switch alarm

Compressor comingon

Pa A07 absent absent Pa A08

Fan 1,2 thermal switchalarm

None absent absent absent Pa A09

TABLE OF ANALOGUE ALARMS:

Alarm name Event Bypasstime

Triggerset point

Hysteresis N. alarmevents/hour

Regulation probe

Anti-freezealarm circuit1

On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off

Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive

Pa A13 ST2 if configuration parameter PaH12 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive

Anti-freezealarm circuit2

On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off

Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive

Pa A13 ST5 if configuration parameter PaH15 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive

Externalanti-freezealarmcircuit 1

On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off

Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive

Pa A13 ST3 if configuration parameter PaH13 = 4, otherwise alarm isinactive

Externalanti-freezealarm circuit2

On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off

Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive

Pa A13 ST6 if configuration parameter PaH16 = 4, otherwise alarm isinactive

Low pressure/lowtemperaturecondensationalarm circuit1

Compressorturned on orreversal of 4-way valve

Par A16 Pa A17 Pa A18positive

Pa A19 ST3 se Pa H13=1 or 2 or else ST4if Pa H14 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive

Low pressure/lowtemperaturecondensationalarm circuit2

Compressorturned on orreversal of 4-3way valve

Par A16 Pa A17 Pa A18positive

Pa A19 ST6 if Pa H16=1, otherwise alarmis inactive

Highpressure/hightemperaturecondensationalarm circuit1

None absent Pa A14 Pa A15negative

Manual reset ST3 if Pa H13=1 or 2, or ST4 if PaH14 = 1; otherwise alarm isinactive

Highpressure/hightemperaturecondensationalarm circuit2

None absent Pa A14 Pa A15negative

Manual reset ST6 if Pa H16=1 or 2, otherwisealarm is inactive

Hightemperatureregulationalgorithmalarm*

None absent Pa A25 Pa A12negative

Automaticreset

ST1

Digital alarms

Analogue alarms

Page 46: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 46

11 TECHNICAL FEATURESx

11.1 Technical data

Typical Min. Max.Power supply voltage 12V~ 10V~ 14V~Power supply frequency 50Hz/60Hz — —Power 5VA — —Insulation class 1 — —Protection grade Front panel

IP0— —

Operating temperature 25°C 0°C 60°COperating humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%

Storage temperature 25°C -20°C 85°CStorage humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%

11.2 Electromechanical features

110/230 V digital outputs n° 8 5 A resistive relays; ¼ hp 230VAC; 1/8 hp 125VACAnalogue outputs n° 2 triac piloting outputs or configurable 4-20 mA outputs

n° 1 4-20 mA outputAnalogue inputs n° 4 NTC R25 10KΩ

N° 2 configurable input or 4-20mA o r NTC R25 10KΩDigital inputs n° 11 voltage-free digital inputs 10m ATerminals and connectors n° 1 10-way high voltage connectors, step 7.5

n° 2 16-way rapid clamp connectors for low voltage, step 4.2, AWG 16-28n° 1 p2.5 5–way connector for remote control and programming withexternal copy card, AWG 24-30n° 1 20-way connector for connection of extensionn° 1 3-way screw terminal for remote keyboard

Serial ports n° 1 9600 serial portn° 1 2400 serial port

The instrument must be powered with a suitable current transformer with the following features:

• Primary voltage: 230V~-15%÷+6%; 110V~±10%• Secondary voltage: 12V~• Power supply frequency: 50Hz; 60Hz• Power: 5VA;

11.3 Regulations

The product complies with the following European Community Directives:• Council Directive 73/23/CEE and subsequent modifications• Council directive 89/336/CEE and subsequent modifications

and complies with the following harmonised regulations:• LOW VOLTAGE: EN60730• EMISSION: EN50081-1 (EN55022)• IMMUNITY: EN50082-1 (IEC 801-2,3,4)

currenttransformer

Page 47: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 47

12 USE OF THE DEVICEx

12.1 Permitted use

This product is used to control single and dual circuit chillers and heat pumps.

To ensure safety, the controller must be installed and operated in accordance with the instructions supplied, and access tohigh voltage components must be prevented under regular operating conditions. The device shall be properly protectedagainst water and dust and shall be accessible by using a tool only. The device is suitable for incorporation in a householdappliance and/or similar air conditioning device.According to the reference regulations, it is classified:• In terms of construction, as an automatic electronic control device to be incorporated with independent assembly or

integrated;• In terms of automatic operating features, as a type 1 action control device, with reference to manufacturing

tolerances and drifts;• As a class 2 device in relation to protection against electrical shock;• As a class A device in relation to software structure and class.

12.2 Forbidden use

Any use other than the permitted use is forbidden.Please note that relay contacts supplied are functional and are subject to fault (in that they are controlled by an electroniccomponent and be shorted or remain open); protection devices recommended by product standards or suggested bycommon sense in response to evident safety requirements shall be implemented outside of the instrument.

Page 48: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 48

13 RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKSx

Microtech shall not be held liable for any damage incurred as a result of:• installation/use other than those intended, and, in particular, failure to comply with the safety instructions specified

by applicable regulations and/or provided in this document;• use with equipment which does not provide adequate protection against electric shocks, water and dust under the

effective conditions of installation;• use with equipment which permits access to hazardous parts without the use of tools;• installation/use with equipment which does not comply with current regulations and legislation.

Page 49: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 49

14 GLOSSARYx

Multiple inputs with an OR relationship to one another are equivalent to a single input with the following status:• Active if at least one input is active• Inactive if no input is active

To “Scroll up” a menu means listing the various parameters from the bottom up (Pa10 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 08 ….)

Indicates that the instrument is waiting, in stand-by mode; all functions are suspended.

Set to zero.

Resetting an alarm means reactivating it ready for a new signal.

A manual reset alarm must be reset using the keyboard.

To “Scroll down” in a menu is to list parameters from the top down (Pa08 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 10 ….)

Means flashing; normally refers to leds

Average number of hours is the ratio between the total number of hours for which the compressors are available and thenumber of compressors in the circuit

Devices in the system, including compressors, fans, hydraulic pump, electrical anti-freeze heaters…

A reference value (set by the user) defining the system’s operating status, such as the thermostat that controlstemperature in the home: if we want to maintain a temperature of 20 °C we set the set point to 20°C (the heating systemwill come on if the temperature in the house falls below 20°C, and go off if it exceeds this value).

Values falling within a given interval; Range 1…100 indicates all values between 1 and 100

A hysteresis is normally defined around a set point to prevent frequent oscillation of the change of status of the load beingcontrolled;Example: suppose we have a set point of 20 °C on a probe for measurement of room temperature, above which acompressor will be started up;When room temperature nears the set point (20 °C) there will be an unstable phase during which the relay which starts upthe compressor will frequently switch from ON to OFF and vice versa, which could result in serious damage to the system.To prevent this problem a hysteresis is defined: an interval of tolerance within which there will be no change in status; inour example, we could set a hysteresis of 1 °C, in which case the compressor would be started up at 21 °C (set point +hysteresis) and turned off at 19 °C (set point – hysteresis)

Memory in which data is maintained even when the device is turned off (as distinct from temporary memory, the data inwhich is lost when the device is turned off.)

Temperature/pressure below or above which proportional output is cut off.

OR logico

Scroll up

Stand-by

Reset

Reset alarm

Manual reset

Scroll down

BLINK

Average numberof hours

Loads

Set Point

Range

Hysteresis

Permanentmemory

Cut-off

Page 50: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 50

15 ANALITIC INDEX

AAlarm events per hour ………………………………….40Alarm parameters ………………………………………..37Alarms …………………………………………………………..40Analogue alarms ………………………………………….45Analogue inputs …………………………………………….6

configuration table …………………………………7resolution and precision……………………………7

Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heatercontrol……………………………………………………….27diagram……………………………………………………..27

Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters…………………………………………………………………..19configuration ………………………………………….19probe configuration…………………………………19

Average number of hours…………………………….49BBLINK …………………………………………………………….49CCF (Control Fan) Modules ……………………………..5Combined or Separate Condensation…………26Components……………………………………………………5Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences

…………………………………………………………………..16Compressor configuration……………………………15

Simple compressors…………………………………15with 1 capacity step…………………………………15with 2 or 3 capacity steps………………………..15

Compressor control – regulation algorithm.23Cooling diagram ……………………………………..23Heating diagram……………………………………….24

Compressor parameters……………………………….38Compressor timing ……………………………………….17

Off-on and on-on diagram for 1compressor …………………………………………..17

Off-on timing ……………………………………………17on-on and off-off diagram 2 comp………..18On-on off-off times for 2 comp……………..17On-on timing…………………………………………….17

Compressor timing: ………………………………………18Compressors………………………………………………….15

coming on on the basis of hours ofoperation and circuit balancing …….16

coming on on the basis of hours ofoperation and circuit saturation ……16

unvaried on sequence with circuitbalancing …………………………………………….17

unvaried on sequence with circuitsaturation ……………………………………………17

Condensation fan …………………………………………18Condensation fan control…………………………….24

Cool mode ………………………………………………..24

Heat mode ………………………………………………. 25Condensation-Defrost probes …………………….. 19

probe configuration …………………………….. 20separate or combined condensation .. 20

Configuration of analogue inputs …………………6Configuration of digital inputs………………………8Configuration of fan outputs…………………………9Configuration of outputs ……………………………….9Configuration parameters ………………………….. 36Connection diagrams……………………………………..6Control during defrost ………………………………… 29

Compressors…………………………………………….. 29Fans ………………………………………………………….. 29Reversing valve ………………………………………… 29

Cooling ………………………………………………………… 21Copy Card …………………………………………………5; 14Cross references ………………………………………………4current transformer …………………………………….. 46Cut-off …………………………………………………………. 49DDefrost …………………………………………………………. 28

compressor management ………………………. 28Defrost end ………………………………………………….. 29

diagram ……………………………………………………. 30Parameter configuration………………………… 29

Defrost parameters……………………………………… 39Defrost start ………………………………………………… 28

diagram ……………………………………………………. 29Setting timer to zero………………………………. 28Stopping timer………………………………………… 28

Description of Parameters ………………………….. 31Device off……………………………………………………… 21DIAGNOSTICS ……………………………………………… 40Differential temperature control………………… 24Digital alarms ……………………………………………… 45Digital inputs ………………………………………………….8

Configuration Table…………………………………8polarity………………………………………………………..8Polarity table ………………………………………………8

Display …………………………………………………………. 10Drip time ……………………………………………………… 29Dynamic Set point ………………………………………. 21

Control parameters ………………………………… 22Modification depending on current input

with negative offset……………………………. 22Modification depending on current input

with positive offset……………………………… 22Modification depending on outdoor

temperature with negative offset……… 23Modification depending on outdoor

temperature with positive offset………. 22

Page 51: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 51

EElectrical heater parameters ……………………….38Electromechanical features………………………….46Energy 400 ………………………………………………………5Extension…………………………………………………………5Extension parameters …………………………………..39FFan configuration …………………………………………18

selection of output type…………………………..18Fan control configuration……………………………18Fan control in cool mode

diagram……………………………………………………..25Fan control in heat mode

diagram……………………………………………………..25Fan control parameters ……………………………….38Forbidden use ……………………………………………….47FUNCTIONS…………………………………………………..28GGLOSSARY ……………………………………………………..49HHeating………………………………………………………….21HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL …………………………4Hydraulic pump ……………………………………………19Hydraulic pump control……………………………….26

diagram……………………………………………………..26Hysteresis ………………………………………………………49IIcons for emphasis: …………………………………………4Impulse duration ………………………………………….18INSTALLATION ……………………………………………….6Internal fan …………………………………………………..19INTRODUCTION ……………………………………………..5KKeyboard……………………………………………………….10Keyboards ……………………………………………………….5Keys ……………………………………………………………….10

Mode …………………………………………………………10LLed …………………………………………………………………10List of alarms ………………………………………………..40Load control………………………………………………….23Loads……………………………………………………………..49Low voltage outputs ………………………………………9MManual reset …………………………………………………49Menu structure……………………………………………..13OOperating modes ………………………………………….21

configuration table…………………………………..21OR logico ………………………………………………………49Outputs …………………………………………………………..9PParallel electrical heaters…………………………….27Param Manager ……………………………………………..5

PARAMETERS ………………………………………………. 31Parameters table…………………………………………. 36Permanent memory…………………………………….. 49Permitted use ………………………………………………. 47Phase shift……………………………………………………. 18Physical quantities and units of measurement

…………………………………………………………………….9Pick-up …………………………………………………………. 18Power outputs…………………………………………………9

Configuration table…………………………………….9Polarity Table ……………………………………………9

Power step……………………………………………………. 15Programming parameters – Menu levels …… 11Pump parameters ……………………………………….. 38RRange …………………………………………………………… 49Recording hours of operation …………………….. 28References ……………………………………………………….4Regulation algorithm in cool mode…………… 23Regulation algorithm in heat mode ………….. 23Regulations………………………………………………….. 46Remote keyboard………………………………………… 11Reset …………………………………………………………….. 49Reset alarm………………………………………………….. 49RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKS……… 48Reversing valve ……………………………………………. 19Reversing valve control……………………………….. 27Reversing valves…………………………………………… 19SSafety timing ……………………………………………….. 17Scroll down ………………………………………………….. 49Scroll up ………………………………………………………. 49selection ………………………………………………………….9Serial Interface (EWTK)…………………………………..5Serial outputs………………………………………………….9Set Point ………………………………………………………. 49Setting set points ………………………………………… 21Stand-by …………………………………………………21; 49SUMMARY ………………………………………………………2Supplementary electrical heaters ………………. 27SYSTEM CONFIGURATION………………………….. 15TTabella Allarmi……………………………………………. 41Technical data…………………………………………….. 46TECHNICAL FEATURES………………………………… 46TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONS……… 21UUnit of measurement: …………………………………….9USE OF THE DEVICE …………………………………….. 47USER INTERFACE …………………………………………. 10VVisibility of parameters and submenus ……… 14WWall-mounted keyboard…………………………….. 11

Page 52: Microtech Energy 400

ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 52

Page 53: Microtech Energy 400

Microtech s.r.l.via dell’Industria, 15Zona Industriale Paludi32010 Pieve d’Alpago (BL)ITALY

Telephone +39 0437 986444Facsimile +39 0437 986163Email [email protected] http:/www.microtech.com

An Invensys company

  • Home
  • Forum
  • TECHNICAL REFRIGERATION
  • Controls
  • Microtech (Invensys) Energy 400 password

  1. Microtech (Invensys) Energy 400 password

    Hi,

    New to the forum,

    Does anyone know the password to allow you to view/adjust parameters on a Microtech Energy 400 controller?

    I have the Tech manual etc but it does not appear to be written in there.

    Many thanks,

    Steve



Posting Permissions

  • You may not post new threads
  • You may not post replies
  • You may not post attachments
  • You may not edit your posts
  •  
  • BB code is On
  • Smilies are On
  • [IMG] code is On
  • [VIDEO] code is On
  • HTML code is Off

Forum Rules

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Micron retro j 23st инструкция
  • Micromaster 440 инструкция по программированию на русском
  • Micrologix 1200 инструкция на русском
  • Microlink 2 инструкция по применению на русском
  • Microlife тонометр bp a100 plus инструкция на русском